MINI
Owner's Manual for the vehicle
Thank you for choosing a MINI.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
MINI. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your MINI.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with
your MINI.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
© 2017 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID4 X/17, 11 17 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 262.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be called up via the follow‐
ing Owner's Manuals: Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle, Online Owner's Manual,
MINI Driver's Guide app.
6 Information
AT A GLANCE
16 Cockpit
20 Central Information Display (CID)
28 Voice activation system
31 Owner's Manual media
CONTROLS
38 Opening and closing
55 Settings
64 Transporting children safely
69 Driving
91 Displays
109 Lights
115 Safety
134 Driving stability control systems
139 Driving comfort
157 Climate control
165 Interior equipment
172 Storage compartments
175 Cargo area
DRIVING TIPS
184 Things to remember when driving
189 Saving fuel
MOBILITY
198 Refueling
200 Fuel
202 Wheels and tires
223 Engine compartment
225 Engine oil
229 Coolant
231 Maintenance
233 Replacing components
244 Breakdown assistance
250 Care
REFERENCE
256 Technical data
260 Appendix
262 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Information
Using this Owner's
Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be called up via the follow‐
ing Owner's Manuals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App.
Additional sources of in‐
formation
Dealer’s service center
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
questions at any time.
Internet
The Owner's Manual and general Information
about MINI, for example on technology, are
available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the ve‐
hicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be
displayed on the Control Display. Additional in‐
formation, refer to page 31.
MINI Motorer’s Guide app
The app specifically describes features and
functions found in the vehicle. The app can be
displayed on smartphones and tablets. Addi‐
tional information, refer to page 33.
Online Owner's Manual
The Online Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the ve‐
hicle. The Online Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played in any of today's browsers. Additional
information, refer to page 33.
Seite 6
Information
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Symbol Meaning
Precautions that must be followed. To
avoid the possibility of personal injury
and serious damage to the vehicle.
◄ End of a specific item of information.
Measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
"..." Control Display texts used to select
individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the
voice activation system..
››...‹‹ Answers generated by the voice
activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out in
the defined order.
1.
First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
ternative possibilities are presented as list with
bullet points.
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
Refers to the relevant section of this
Owner's Manual for further information on a
particular part or assembly.
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes
and illustrates features and functions that are
not available in your vehicle, for example be‐
cause of the selected optional features or the
country-specific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
Your dealer’s service center is happy to answer
any questions that you may have about the
features and options applicable to your vehicle.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Seite 7
Information
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
For Your Own Safety
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayerische
Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, BMW AG.
Intended use
Follow the following when using the vehicle:
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
stickers.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where
the vehicle is driven.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu‐
ments.
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery,
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
to be operated in a different country it might
be necessary to adapt your vehicle to poten‐
tially differing operating conditions and regis‐
tration requirements. If your vehicle does not
comply with the homologation requirements in
a certain country you may not be able to lodge
warranty claims for your vehicle there. Further
information on warranty is available from a
dealer’s service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to a
MINI dealer’s service center. If you choose to
use another service facility, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends use of a facility that
performs work, for instance maintenance and
repair, according to MINI specifications with
properly trained personnel, referred to in this
Owner's Manual as "another qualified service
center or repair shop".
If work is performed improperly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of sub‐
sequent damage and related safety risks.
Parts and accessories
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
the use of parts and accessory products ap‐
proved by the manufacturer of the MINI.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice on
their use and installation are available from a
MINI dealer's service center.
MINI parts and accessories were tested by the
manufacturer of the MINI for their safety and
suitability in MINI vehicles.
The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants gen‐
uine MINI parts and accessories.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not
evaluate whether each individual product from
another manufacturer can be used with MINI
vehicles without presenting a safety hazard,
even if a country-specific official approval was
issued. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
not evaluate whether these products are suita‐
ble for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth de‐
fects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐
Seite 8
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is
operated under those conditions. If you wish to
operate your vehicle in another country or re‐
gion, you may be required to adapt your vehi‐
cle to meet different prevailing operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements. You
should also be aware of any applicable war‐
ranty limitations or exclusions for such country
or region. In such case, please contact Cus‐
tomer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ MINI Maintenance system.
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models.
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models.
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not
covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited War‐
ranty.
Data memory
General information
Electronic control devices are installed in the
vehicle. Some of these are necessary for the ve‐
hicle to function safely or provide assistance
during driving, for instance driver assistance
systems. Furthermore, control devices facilitate
comfort or infotainment functions.
Electronic control devices contain data memo‐
ries, which are able to temporarily or perma‐
nently store information about the condition of
the vehicle, component load, maintenance re‐
quirements, technical events or faults.
This information generally records the state of a
component, a module, a system or the environ‐
ment, for instance:
▷ Operating states of system components,
e.g., fill levels, tire inflation pressure, bat‐
tery status.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its indi‐
vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational
speed, wheel speed, deceleration, trans‐
verse acceleration, engaged safety belt in‐
dicator.
Seite 9
Information
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system
components, for instance lights and brakes.
▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or en‐
gagement of the stability control systems.
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain
sensor signals.
The data is required to perform the control de‐
vice functions. Furthermore, it also serves to
recognize and correct malfunctions, and helps
the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle
functions. The majority of this data is transient
and is only processed within the vehicle itself.
Only a small proportion of the data is stored in
event or fault memories and, if needed, in the
vehicle key.
Reading out data
When servicing, for instance during repairs,
service processes, warranty cases, and quality
assurance measures, this technical information
can be read out from the vehicle together with
the vehicle identification number. A dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop can read out the information.
The socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis re‐
quired by law in the vehicle is used to read out
the data. The data is collected, processed, and
used by the relevant organizations in the serv‐
ice network. The data documents the technical
conditions of the vehicle, helps in locating
faults and improving quality, and is transferred
to the vehicle manufacturer, if needed.
Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
monitoring duties to meet in line with product
liability law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle
manufacturer needs technical data from the
vehicle. Fault and event memories in the vehi‐
cle can be reset when a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop performs repair or servicing work.
Data on the scope of servicing work performed
and maintenance records are stored in the ve‐
hicle by means of the service history and trans‐
ferred to the vehicle manufacturer. The vehicle
owner can contact a dealer's service center to
object to the data being stored and transferred
to the vehicle manufacturer. This objection ap‐
plies for as long as the vehicle owner remains
the proprietor of the vehicle.
Data entry and data transfer into the
vehicle
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some
data can be transferred into the vehicle when
using comfort and infotainment functions,
for instance:
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or
photos for playback in an integrated multi‐
media system.
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction
with an integrated hands-free system or an
integrated navigation system.
▷ Entered navigation destinations.
▷ Data on the use of Internet services.
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or
is found on a device that has been connected
to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle,
it can be deleted at any time. This data is only
transmitted to third parties if expressly desired.
This depends on the personal settings selected
for using online services.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol‐
lowing comfort and individual settings can be
stored in the vehicle and modified at any time,
for instance:
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel po‐
sitions.
▷ Suspension and climate control settings.
▷ Individual settings, for instance lighting in
the car's interior.
Seite 10
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Control via mobile devices
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile
devices connected to the vehicle, for instance
smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
control elements. The sound and picture from
the mobile device can be played back and dis‐
played through the multimedia system. Certain
information is transferred to the mobile device
at the same time. Depending on the type of
connection, this includes, for instance position
data and other general vehicle information.
This optimizes the way in which selected apps,
for instance navigation or music playback,
work.
There is no further interaction between the mo‐
bile device and the vehicle, for instance active
access to vehicle data. How the data will be
processed further is determined by the provider
of the particular app being used. The extent of
the possible settings depends on the respective
app and the operating system of the mobile
device.
Services
General information
If the vehicle has a wireless network connec‐
tion, this enables data to be exchanged be‐
tween the vehicle and other systems. The wire‐
less network connection is realized via an in-
vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via
personal mobile devices brought into the vehi‐
cle, for instance smartphones. This wireless net‐
work connection enables 'online functions' to
be used. These include online services and apps
supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or by
other providers.
Services from the vehicle manufacturer
Where online services from the vehicle manu‐
facturer are concerned, the corresponding
functions are described in the appropriate
place, for instance the Owner's Manual or man‐
ufacturer's website. The relevant legal informa‐
tion pertaining to data protection is provided
there too. Personal data may be used to per‐
form online services. Data is exchanged over a
secure connection, for instance with the IT sys‐
tems of the vehicle manufacturer intended for
this purpose. Any collection, processing, and
use of personal data above and beyond that
needed to provide the services must always be
based on a legal permission, contractual ar‐
rangement or consent.
In addition, the vehicle manufacturer evaluates
anonymized information on transport infra‐
structure and how the infotainment system is
used. This information cannot be traced back to
individual vehicles or people. Evaluating the
data enables the manufacturer to further im‐
prove its products or services, for instance by
incorporating the most up-to-date traffic bulle‐
tins. The data transfer feature can be deacti‐
vated in the vehicle. Certain services and func‐
tions, some of which are subject to a charge,
can be deactivated by the driver. It is also pos‐
sible to activate or deactivate the data connec‐
tion as a whole. That is, with the exception of
functions and services required by law such as
Assist systems.
Services from other providers
When using online services from other provid‐
ers, these services are the responsibility of the
relevant provider and subject to their data pri‐
vacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle
manufacturer has no influence on the content
exchanged during this process. Information on
the way in which personal data is collected and
used in relation to services from third parties,
the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be
obtained from the relevant service provider.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
Seite 11
Information
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better understand‐
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, for instance name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification
number
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment, on the right-hand
side of the vehicle.
The vehicle identification number can be found
on the type label, on the right-hand side of the
vehicle.
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
Seite 12
Information
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or MINI of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 13
Information
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
WATCH ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Cockpit
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows 50
2 Exterior mirror operation 61
3 Buttons of the central locking system 42
4 Lights
Front fog lights 112
Rear fog light 112
Light switch 109
Lights off
Daytime running lights 111
Parking lights 109
Low beams 109
Seite 16
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Automatic headlight control 110
Cornering light 111
High-beam Assistant 111
Instrument lighting 113
5 Steering wheel buttons, left
Camera-based cruise control on/
off 139
Cruise control on/off 144
Cruise control: store speed
Pausing, continuing cruise control
Cruise control: increase speed
Cruise control: reduce speed
Camera-based cruise control: re‐
duce distance
Camera-based cruise control: in‐
crease distance
6 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 74
High beams, head‐
light flasher 74
High-beam Assistant 111
Roadside parking lights 110
Onboard Computer 100
7 Instrument cluster 91
8 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers 78
Rain sensor 79
Cleaning windows 76
Rear window wiper 77
Clean the rear window 77
9 Steering wheel buttons, right
Voice activation 28
Telephone
Confirm the selection 100
Move selection up 100
Move selection down 100
Increase volume
Reduce volume
10 Horn, entire surface
Seite 17
Cockpit
AT A GLANCE
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
11 Adjust the steering wheel 63 12 Unlock hood 223
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Hazard warning system 244
Intelligent Safety 125
2 Control Display 20
3 Radio/Multimedia
4 Glove compartment 172
5 Climate control 157
6 PDC Park Distance Control 146
Rearview camera 149
Parking assistant 152
Auto Start/Stop function 71
Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 69
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 134
MINI Driving Modes switch 136
7 Steptronic transmission selector lever 83
Manual transmission selector lever 82
8 Controller with buttons 21
9 Parking brake 74
Seite 18
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Central Information Display (CID)
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Concept
The Central Information Display (CID) combines
the functions of a multitude of switches. Thus,
these functions can be operated from a central
location.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information sys‐
tems and communication devices while driving
can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Only use the systems or devices when the
traffic situation allows. If necessary, stop and
use the systems and devices while the vehicle is
stationary.◀
Overview of control ele‐
ments
Control elements
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
the equipment version, with touchpad
Control Display
General information
To clean the Control Display, follow the care in‐
structions, refer to page 253.
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense so‐
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
down to complete deactivation. Once the tem‐
perature is reduced, for instance through shade
or air conditioning, the normal functions are re‐
stored.
Safety information
NOTE
Objects in the area in the front of the
Control Display can shift and damage the Con‐
trol Display. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not place objects in the area in front of
the Control Display.◀
Seite 20
AT A GLANCE
Central Information Display (CID)
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Switching on
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the Controller.
Switching off
1.
Press button.
2. "Turn off control display"
Controller with navigation system
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some functions of the Central Information Dis‐
play (CID) can be operated using the touchpad
on the Controller, refer to page 23:
▷ Turn.
▷ Press.
▷ Move in four directions.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
MENU Opens the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL Opens the Phone menu.
BACK Displays the previous display.
OPTION Open the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
▷ Turn.
Seite 21
Central Information Display (CID)
AT A GLANCE
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ Press.
▷ Move in two directions.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
MENU Opens the main menu.
AUDIO Open audio menu last listened to,
switch between audio menus.
TEL Opens the Phone menu.
BACK Open the previous display.
OPTION Open the Options menu.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press button.
The main menu is displayed.
All Central Information Display (CID) functions
can be called up via the main menu.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1.
Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, for in‐
stance "Settings".
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, for instance
"Radio", a new display appears. Displays can
overlap.
Seite 22
AT A GLANCE
Central Information Display (CID)
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ Move the Controller to the left.
Closes the current display and shows the
previous display.
Reopens previous display by pressing BACK
button. In this case, the current display is
not closed.
▷ Move the Controller to the right.
Opens a new display on top of the previous
screen.
Arrows pointing to the left or right indicate that
additional displays can be opened.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional options: move the Controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
displayed.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split screen".
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, for instance for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, for instance "Store
station".
Changing settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐
tion.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Touchpad
Some functions of the Central Information Dis‐
play (CID) can be operated using the touchpad
on the Controller:
Selecting functions
1.
"Settings"
2. "Touchpad"
3. Select the desired function.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
Seite 23
Central Information Display (CID)
AT A GLANCE
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ "Interactive map": use the interactive
map.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. To
make entries, it may be necessary to
change between upper and lower-case let‐
ters, numbers and characters, refer to
page 27.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such as
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized. The set language deter‐
mines what input is possible. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the Con‐
troller.
▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, swipe to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
in the lower area of the touchpad.
Operating the interactive map
The interactive map in the navigation system
can be moved via the touchpad.
Function Operation
Interactive map. Swipe into respective di‐
rection.
Enlarge/shrink in‐
teractive map.
Drag in or out on the
touchpad with fingers.
Display menu. Tap once.
Changing settings
You can use the touchpad to change Control
Display settings, for instance volume. Swipe left
or right to do this.
Example: setting the
clock
Setting the clock
1.
Press button. The main menu is dis‐
played.
2. Turn the Controller until "Settings" is
highlighted, and then press the Controller.
3. If necessary, move the Controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the Controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the Controller.
5. Turn the Controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the Controller.
Seite 24
AT A GLANCE
Central Information Display (CID)
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
6. Turn the Controller to set the hours, and
then press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller to set the minutes, and
then press the Controller.
Status information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right:
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Signal strength of cellular network.
▷ Phone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows:
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular network.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Cellular network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
SMS text message received.
Symbol Meaning
Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.
SIM card is missing.
Enter PIN.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
USB audio interface.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are switched off.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, for instance infor‐
mation from the Onboard Computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when switching to another menu.
Switching the split screen on/off
On the Control Display:
1. Press button.
2. "Split screen"
Seite 25
Central Information Display (CID)
AT A GLANCE
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Selecting the display
On the Control Display:
1.
Press button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the Controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the Controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The Central Information Display (CID) functions
can be stored on the programmable memory
buttons and called up directly, for instance
radio stations, navigation destinations, phone
numbers and menu entries.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Storing a function
1.
Highlight function via the Central Informa‐
tion Display (CID).
2.
Press and hold the desired button,
until a signal sounds.
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately.
This means, for instance that the number is di‐
aled when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves
or use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments
1.
Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Deleting personal data
in the vehicle
Concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
This personal data can be permanently deleted
via the Central Information Display (CID).
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol‐
lowing data is deleted:
▷ Personal Profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
Seite 26
AT A GLANCE
Central Information Display (CID)
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destina‐
tions.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Voice notes.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 30 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the Control
Display.
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. "Settings"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete all personal data"
5. "Continue"
6. "OK"
Entering letters and
numbers
General information
1.
Turn the Controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers, if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the Controller: delete letters or
number.
Press the Controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case letters
and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or Tip the Controller up.
Without navigation system
Select the symbol.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the
choice is narrowed down with every letter en‐
tered and letters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during entry
for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐
tered in all languages that are available on
the Control Display.
Seite 27
Central Information Display (CID)
AT A GLANCE
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Concept
Most functions displayed on the Control Display
can be operated by voice commands via the
voice activation system. The system supports
you with announcements during input.
General information
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the
voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal
instructions to use with the voice activation
system.
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
Functional requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
To set the language, refer to page 104.
Using the voice activa‐
tion system
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press button on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
A command that is recognized by the voice
activation system is announced and dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, operate
the function via the Central Information Display
(CID).
Terminating the voice activation
system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
General information
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
voiced as commands.
Seite 28
AT A GLANCE
Voice activation system
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
There are short commands for many functions.
You may select list entries such as phone list
entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐
tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the
respective list.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹
E.g., if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the
commands for the settings are read out loud.
Executing functions using short
commands
Execute functions on the main menu via short
commands. It almost doesn't matter which
menu item is selected, for instance ›Vehicle
status‹.
The list for short commands of the voice activa‐
tion system can be called up via the Integrated
Owner's Manual on the Control Display.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐
tion about the current operating options
and the most important commands for
them.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: announces in‐
formation about the principle of operation
for the voice activation system.
Example: opening the
tone settings
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the Controller.
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output,
if needed.
2.
Press button on the steering wheel.
3. ›Radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Via short command
The desired tone settings can also be started
via a short command.
1.
Switch on the Entertainment sound output,
if needed.
2.
Press button on the steering wheel.
3. ›Tone‹
Setting the voice dialog
You can set the system to use standard dialog
or a short version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays back
short messages in abbreviated form.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech type:"
4. Select setting.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
Seite 29
Voice activation system
AT A GLANCE
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Information on Emer‐
gency Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establishment
of a phone connection.
Environmental condi‐
tions
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 30
AT A GLANCE
Voice activation system
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Owner's Manual media
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
You can use various media formats to call up
the content in the Owner's Manual. The follow‐
ing Owner's Manual media formats are availa‐
ble:
▷ Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 31.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle,
refer to page 31.
▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App, refer to
page 33.
▷ Online Owner's Manual, refer to page 33.
There are different features, refer to page 34,
in each of the different media formats.
Printed Owner's Manual
Concept
The printed Owner's Manual describes all
standard, country-specific, and optional fea‐
tures offered with the series.
General information
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
Supplementary Owner's Manuals
Also follow the instructions of the Supplemen‐
tary Owner's Manuals, which are included in
addition to the onboard literature.
Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle
Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the ve‐
hicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be
displayed on the Control Display.
Selecting the Owner's Manual
1. Press button.
2. Turn the Controller: open "Vehicle
info".
3. Press the Controller.
4. Select the required method of accessing the
contents:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
Seite 31
Owner's Manual media
AT A GLANCE
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Page by page with link access
Turn the Controller until the next or previous
page is displayed.
Page by page without link access
Scroll through the pages directly while skipping
the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
the Controller to browse from page to page.
Scroll back.
Scroll forward.
Context help
General information
The section of the Owner's Manual relating to
the function that is currently selected can be
displayed directly.
Opening via Central Information
Display (CID)
Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display:
1. Press button or move the Controller to
the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to
the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and
to alternate between the two displays:
1. Press button or move the Controller to
the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press button again to return to last
displayed function.
5.
Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate continuously between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens
a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly.
Storing
1.
Select "Owner's Manual" via the Central In‐
formation Display (CID).
Seite 32
AT A GLANCE
Owner's Manual media
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
2.
Press and hold the desired button,
until a signal sounds.
Executing
Press button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.
MINI Motorer’s Guide app
Concept
The app specifically describes features and
functions found in the vehicle.
The app can be displayed on smartphones and
tablets.
General information
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
tries as an app for iOS or Android in the respec‐
tive Store.
Entering the vehicle identification number fil‐
ters the contents.
Vehicles
It is possible to store Owner's Manuals for vari‐
ous vehicles in the app.
It is also possible to test the app using a dem‐
onstration vehicle.
Operating systems and language
The app is available for the iOS and Android op‐
erating systems.
The Owner's Manual is downloaded in the lan‐
guage of the device.
Online Owner's Manual
Concept
The Online Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the ve‐
hicle.
The Online Owner's Manual can be displayed in
any of today's browsers.
General information
The Online Owner's Manual is available in
many countries. An account on the customer
portal may be required.
Entering the vehicle identification number fil‐
ters the contents.
Vehicles
It is possible to store several individual Owner's
Manuals for various vehicles.
Language
The language is based on whichever language
is set in the operating system.
Printing
You can use the print function for automatically
formatting and printing out individual chapters.
Media components
General information
The following components are not available to
the same extent in all media formats.
Additional information on availability, refer to
page 34.
Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
tion on how to operate the vehicle, how to use
basic vehicle functions and what to do in case
of a breakdown.
Seite 33
Owner's Manual media
AT A GLANCE
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Search by illustrations
Based on illustrations, image search provides
information and descriptions. This is helpful
when the terminology for a feature is not at
hand.
Frequently asked questions
This chapter provides answers to frequently
asked questions about your vehicle and helpful
links to additional information.
Quick links
The chapter on quick links explains the most
important information and operating instruc‐
tions on the basis of various situations.
Videos
The videos explain the main functions of the
systems.
Smart Scan
You can use Smart Scan to scan various sym‐
bols in the vehicle. After a brief explanation of
the symbol in question appears, it is then possi‐
ble to display the chapter directly.
Smart Scan is only available for the iOS operat‐
ing system.
Keyword search
You can use keywords to search for information
and descriptions in the media.
Key features
Printed Integrated APP Online
All equipment included. X — — —
Equipment included in vehicle. — X X X
Quick Reference Guide. — X X X
Search by illustrations. — X X X
Frequently asked questions. — — X X
Quick links. — — X X
Videos. — X X X
Smart Scan. — — X —
Keyword search. X X X X
X: included.
—: not included.
Seite 34
AT A GLANCE
Owner's Manual media
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Seite 35
Owner's Manual media
AT A GLANCE
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
HANDLE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Remote control
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key.
Each remote control contains a replaceable
battery. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 40.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. Settings, refer to page 48.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Personal Profile, refer to
page 46.
The remote controls hold information about re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the remote
control, refer to page 231.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take
the remote control with you so that the vehicle
can be opened from the outside.◀
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possible
with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol‐
lowing actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
4 Panic mode
Seite 38
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Unlocking
Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 48,
the following access points are unlocked.
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
Press the button of the remote control
again to unlock the other vehicle access
points.
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.
In addition, the following functions are exe‐
cuted:
▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, re‐
fer to page 46, are applied.
▷ The interior lights and courtesy lights are
switched on.
These functions are not available if the inte‐
rior lights were switched off manually.
▷ The welcome lights are switched on, if this
function was activated.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 49, is
switched off.
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are opened,
as long as the button on the remote control is
pressed.
Locking
1.
Close the driver's door.
2.
Press button on the remote con‐
trol.
All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
are locked.
The alarm system, refer to page 49, is
switched on.
3.
Press and hold this button on the
remote control in the area close to the ve‐
hicle after locking.
The exterior mirrors are folded in.
If the engine or ignition is still switched on
when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn
honks twice. In this case, the engine or ignition
must be switched off by means of the Start/
Stop button.
With Comfort Access: convenient
closing
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
Closing
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control in the area close to the
vehicle.
The windows and the glass sunroof are closed,
as long as the button on the remote control is
pressed.
The exterior mirrors are folded in.
Switch on interior lights and courtesy
light
Press button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
These functions are not available if the interior
lights were switched off manually.
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
Seite 39
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing
the button again.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, it is possible to specify
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the
settings, refer to page 48.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Opening
Press and hold button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press button on the remote control
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐
trol three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Replacing the battery
1. Remove the integrated key from the re‐
mote control, refer to page 42.
2. Slide the integrated key into the opening
and raise the cover.
The battery compartment is accessible.
3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of the
battery compartment and raise the cover.
Seite 40
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
4. Push battery in the direction of the arrow
using a pointed object and lift it out.
5. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi‐
tive side facing up.
6. Insert lid and cover.
7. Push the integrated key into the remote
control until it engages.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop or
take them to a collection point.
Additional remote controls
Additional remote controls are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls
A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 40.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of mobile devices, for in‐
stance charging of a mobile phone.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
integrated key, refer to page 42.
Starting the engine via emergency
detection of the remote control
It is not possible to start the engine if the re‐
mote control has not been detected.
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the remote control has not been de‐
tected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1.
Hold the remote control as shown against
the marked area on the steering column.
Pay attention to the display in the instru‐
ment cluster.
2. If the remote control is detected:
Start the engine within 10 seconds.
Seite 41
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and
repeat the procedure.
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without remote control using the integrated
key.
Safety information
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possible
with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
NOTE
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated
key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage
to property. Remove the integrated key before
pulling the outside door handle.◀
Removing
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Locking/unlocking via the door lock
1. Remove lid on the door lock.
To do this, slide the integrated key into the
opening from below and remove the lid.
2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐
cle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via
the door lock. In order to stop this alarm, un‐
lock vehicle with the remote control or switch
on the ignition, if needed, through emergency
detection of the remote control, refer to
page 41.
Buttons for the central
locking system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Seite 42
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft
when locking.
Unlocking
Press button.
Opening
▷
Press button to unlock the doors
together, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the
door to open the door. The other doors re‐
main locked.
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle
on the door to be opened; the first time un‐
locks the door, the second time opens it.
The other doors remain locked.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
car's interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Open the tailgate.
Functional requirements
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Unlocking
On the driver's or front passenger's outer door
handle, press the button.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 48,
only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
may be unlocked. Unlike when unlocking with
the remote control, pressing the button on the
outer door handle again does not unlock the
other vehicle access points. Rather, the vehicle
is locked again.
If a door of a locked vehicle was opened from
the inside via the door opener, pressing the
button on the outer door handle first locks the
Seite 43
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
vehicle again. To unlock, the button on the
outer door handle must be pressed again.
This is the case whether the vehicle was locked
automatically after driving off or via the central
locking system button from the inside.
Locking
On the driver's or front passenger's outer door
handle, press the button.
Convenient closing
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
Closing
Press and hold down the button on the driver's
or front passenger's outer door handle.
In addition to locking, the windows and glass
sunroof will be closed.
The exterior mirrors are folded in.
Opening the tailgate
General information
If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
locked doors are not unlocked.
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Opening
Press button next on tailgate.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
Seite 44
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 40.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock‐
ing request recognition function on the door
handles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 42.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, it is possible to specify
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the
settings, refer to page 48.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Opening and closing
Opening from the outside
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
have the remote control with you.
Press button next on tailgate.
▷ Press and hold button on the re‐
mote control for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked. Unlocking with the re‐
mote control, refer to page 40.
The tailgate is opened slightly and can be
swung upward.
Seite 45
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Opening from the inside
With Steptronic transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, press the
button in the driver's floor area.
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P
must be engaged first.
With manual transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, press the
button in the driver's floor area twice in quick
succession.
Closing
Recessed grips on the interior trim of the tail‐
gate can be used to conveniently pull down the
tailgate.
Personal Profile
Concept
Via Personal Profiles, individual settings for sev‐
eral drivers can be stored and called up again
when required.
General information
There are three driver profiles with which per‐
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐
mote control has one of these driver profiles
assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal driver profile will be
activated. All settings stored in the driver profile
are automatically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings dur‐
ing unlocking. These settings are also restored,
if the vehicle has been used in the meantime
by a person with a different remote control.
Changes to the settings are automatically
stored in the driver profile currently activated.
If another driver profile is selected via the Cen‐
tral Information Display (CID), the settings
stored in it will be applied automatically. The
new driver profile is assigned to the remote
control currently used.
There is an additional guest profile available
that is not assigned to any remote control: it
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle
without changing the personal driver profiles.
Functional requirements
For the system to be able to identify the driver
profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐
tected remote control must be clearly allocated
to the driver.
This is the case when:
▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own re‐
mote control.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle.
▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the
driver's door.
Settings
The settings for the following systems and func‐
tions are stored in the active profile. The scope
of storable settings depends on country and
equipment.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
▷ Radio.
▷ Instrument cluster.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
Seite 46
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ Control Display.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Navigation.
▷ PDC Park Distance Control.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Head-up Display.
▷ MINI Driving Modes.
▷ Intelligent Safety.
Profile management
Opening profiles
Regardless of the remote control in use, a dif‐
ferent profile may be activated. This allows you
to call up personal vehicle settings, even if you
did not unlock the vehicle with your own re‐
mote control.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Select a profile.
The following functions are executed:
▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile
are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐
mote control being used at the time.
▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐
ent remote control, this profile will apply to
both remote controls.
Using a guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that
are stored in none of the three personal pro‐
files.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Guest"
4. Adjust the settings.
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
Renaming profiles
A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐
file to avoid confusion between the profiles.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The active profile is selected.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Rename current profile"
Reset profiles
The settings of the profile currently in use are
reset to their factory settings.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reset current profile"
Exporting profiles
Most settings of the profile currently in use can
be exported.
Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving
personal settings, for instance before delivering
the vehicle to a workshop. Profiles can be taken
to another vehicle equipped with the Personal
Profile function.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile"
4. "USB device"
Importing profiles
Profiles stored on a USB storage device can be
imported via the USB interface.
Seite 47
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐
ported profile.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"
4. "USB device"
Display profile list during start
The profile list can be displayed during each
start to select the desired profile.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display user list at startup"
System limits
A clear assignment between the remote control
and driver may not be possible in the following
cases, for example.
▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his
or her own remote control, but another
person is driving.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
Access and has multiple remote controls
with him or her.
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
▷ Multiple remote controls are located out‐
side of the vehicle.
Settings
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, various settings for open‐
ing and closing are possible.
These settings are stored for the driver profile,
refer to page 46, currently used.
Unlocking
Doors
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired function.
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Tailgate"
Only the tailgate is unlocked.
▷ "Tailgate + door(s)"
The tailgate and the doors are un‐
locked.
Depending on optional features and country
version, this setting is not offered in some
cases.
Automatic locking
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
Seite 48
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is
opened after unlocking.
▷ "Lock after start driving"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the desired setting.
▷ With alarm system:
"Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
the horn.
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
Alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood
or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the car's interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the vehicle.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
▷ Improper use of the socket for Onboard Di‐
agnosis.
The alarm system signals these changes visually
and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm.
Depending on local regulations, the acous‐
tic alarm may be suppressed.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
Overview
Indicator light on the interior mirror.
Switching on/off
When you unlock and lock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or with Comfort Access,
the alarm system is switched off and on at the
same time.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 50.
Opening the tailgate with the alarm
system switched on
The tailgate can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again provided the doors are
locked. The hazard warning system flashes
once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press button on the remote control
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
Seite 49
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐
trol three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Signals of the indicator light
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec‐
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
access points are secured.
When the still open access points are
closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
sensor will be switched on.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such as
attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is
towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized
action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles,
at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
▷ At the gas station: if the vehicle is locked af‐
ter refueling starts.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion
sensor can be switched off in such situations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehi‐
cle is locked.
The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are switched off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control
or switch on the ignition, if needed through
emergency detection of remote control, re‐
fer to page 41.
▷ With Comfort Access: If you have the re‐
mote control with you, unlock the vehicle
using the button on the driver's side or pas‐
senger side door.
Power windows
General information
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
windows are automatically closed except a
gap.
Seite 50
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Safety information
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
Overview
On 5-door models
Power windows
Safety switch
On 3-door models
Power windows
Opening
▷
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is being
held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
fer to page 39.
Closing
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance point.
The window closes while the switch is being
held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically if the door
is closed. Pulling the switch again stops the
motion.
Convenient closing via the remote control, refer
to page 39.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 44.
Jam protection system
General information
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as a
window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window opens slightly.
Safety information
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is a
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.◀
Seite 51
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Closing without the jam protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
The window closes with limited jam protec‐
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific
threshold, closing is interrupted.
2.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and
hold it there.
The window closes without jam protection.
On 5-door models: safety switch
General information
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent children, for instance from
opening and closing the rear windows using
the switches in the rear.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
safety function is switched off automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED lights up if the safety function
is switched on.
Malfunction
General information
In certain situations a window can only be op‐
erated to a limited extent.
▷ After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the a window can only be
operated to a limited extent. The system
must be initialized in this case.
▷ The power window motors are equipped
with overheating protection. If a window is
opened and closed several times within a
short period of time, the overheating pro‐
tection switches the motor off temporarily.
Depending on the degree of overheating, it
may only be possible to close the window
or it may not be possible to operate it at all.
In this case: allow the power window motor
to cool down.
Initializing the system
The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
During initialization, the affected window
closes without jam protection.
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
1.
Open the affected window completely.
2.
Pull the switch to the resistance point
and hold.
The window closes.
3.
Continue holding the switch pulled to
the resistance point.
The window opens and closes once or twice
after approx. 15 seconds, depending on the
vehicle's equipment.
4. Release switch.
Panoramic glass sun‐
roof
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the glass sun‐
roof is automatically closed.
Seite 52
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
Overview
Tilting the glass sunroof
Press back the switch up to or
beyond the resistance point and
release it.
The glass sunroof is raised.
Opening glass sunroof
When the glass sunroof is closed
Press the switch back beyond
the resistance point and release
it twice.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again stops
the motion.
With the glass sunroof completely
raised
▷ Slide switch back to the re‐
sistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is opened
as long as the switch is
pressed.
▷ Press the switch back beyond the resist‐
ance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐
terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not
fully open. In these models, the automatic
function initially only opens the glass sunroof
up to this comfort position.
Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐
roof fully.
Closing glass sunroof
With the glass sunroof open
▷ Slide switch forward to the
resistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is closed as
long as the switch is pressed
and stops in the raised posi‐
tion.
▷ Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐
ance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is closed and stops in the
raised position.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
▷ Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐
ance point and release it twice.
The glass sunroof is closed.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Seite 53
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
With the glass sunroof completely
raised
Press the switch forward beyond
the resistance point and release
it.
The glass sunroof is closed.
Jam protection system
General information
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
glass sunroof closes, the closing action is inter‐
rupted.
The glass sunroof opens slightly.
Closing without the jam protection
system
If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1.
Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
protection. If the closing force exceeds a
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.
2. Push the switch forward again past the re‐
sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐
roof closes without jam protection. Make
sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing after a power interruption
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
operated to a limited extent. The system must
be initialized in this case. MINI recommends
having this work performed only by a dealer's
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Seite 54
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Settings
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the needs
of the occupants can make a vital contribution
to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Follow the in‐
formation in the following chapters:
▷ Seats, refer to page 55.
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 57.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 59.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 115.
Front seats
Safety information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the efficacy of safety gear, including safety
belts can no longer be ensured. There is a risk
of sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Ad‐
just the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the
backrest so that it is in the most upright posi‐
tion as possible and do not adjust again while
driving.◀
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Adjusting seats
Overview
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt
Seite 55
Settings
CONTROLS
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
or back slightly making sure it engages prop‐
erly.
Height
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as
needed to reach the desired height.
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the spine
are supported for upright posture.
Turn the wheel in order to increase or decrease
the curvature.
Thigh support
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
In 3-door models: entering the rear
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Seite 56
CONTROLS
Settings
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the backrest
while driving may occur due to an unlocked
backrest. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
a risk of injury. Fold back and lock the backrests
before driving.◀
Folding down the backrest
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold backrest forward.
3. Push the seat forward.
Original position
The driver's seat features a mechanical mem‐
ory function for forward/back and backrest ad‐
justment.
1.
Push the seat back into the original posi‐
tion.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
If the backrest is folded back when the seat is
not yet in the original position, the seat en‐
gages in the current position. In this case, man‐
ually adjust longitudinal direction, refer to
page 56.
Front seat heating
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au‐
tomatically with the temperature selected last.
When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to
page 190, the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts and safety belt
buckles
The vehicle is fitted with four or five safety belts
to ensure occupants' safety. However, they can
only offer protection when adjusted correctly.
The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear
seat are intended for the persons sitting on the
left and right.
Seite 57
Settings
CONTROLS
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
The center safety belt buckle of the rear seat is
intended for the person sitting in the middle.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐
though airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
If needed, disengage the safety belt in the rear
from the belt buckle on the side.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of every
build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
WARNING
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than
one person will potentially defeat the ability of
the safety belt to serve its protective func‐
tion.There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Do not allow more than one person to wear a
single safety belt. Infants and children are not
allowed on an occupant's lap, but must be
transported and secured in designated child re‐
straint systems.◀
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐
ries, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure
that all occupants are wearing safety belts cor‐
rectly.◀
WARNING
With a rear backrest that is not locked,
the protective function of the middle safety belt
is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. If you are using the middle safety
belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.◀
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail in
the following situations:
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
way.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean.
Have the safety belts checked after an accident
at the dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.◀
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
your body over your lap and shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The safety belt may not press on
your stomach.
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐
ward around your upper body.
Buckling the safety belt
1.
Slowly guide the safety belt out of the
holder when fastening it.
Seite 58
CONTROLS
Settings
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt
buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage
audibly.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1.
Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and front passenger seat
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light lights up and a signal
sounds. Make sure that the safety belts
are positioned correctly. The safety belt
reminder can also be activated if objects are
placed on the front passenger seat.
Front head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head restraints
can cause injuries in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐
straints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back of
the head. Adjust the distance via the back‐
rest tilt as needed.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been deter‐
mined to be safe for attachment to a head
restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance pil‐
lows, while driving.◀
Adjusting the height: John Cooper
Works sport seat
The height of the head restraints cannot be ad‐
justed.
Adjusting the height
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
Seite 59
Settings
CONTROLS
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, move the head re‐
straint up or down slightly, making sure it en‐
gages properly.
Removing: John Cooper Works sport
seat
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Fold the seat backrest forward if needed.
2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head restraints
can cause injuries in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐
straints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back of
the head. Adjust the distance via the back‐
rest tilt as needed.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been deter‐
mined to be safe for attachment to a head
restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance pil‐
lows, while driving.◀
Adjusting the height
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, move the head re‐
straint up or down slightly, making sure it en‐
gages properly.
Seite 60
CONTROLS
Settings
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Fold down
▷ To fold down: press the button, arrow 1,
and press down the head restraint, arrow 2.
▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the
front as far as it will go. Make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to
page 177, in question.
2. Pull head restraint up against the resist‐
ance.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
Safety information
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traffic
behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in‐
stance while changing lanes. There is a risk of
an accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic
behind by looking over your shoulder.◀
Overview
1 Settings
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
Press button.
The mirror movement follows the but‐
ton movement.
Seite 61
Settings
CONTROLS
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror
glass.
Folding in and out
NOTE
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There
is a risk of damage to property. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀
Press button.
Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap‐
prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the
following situations:
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the car's inte‐
rior mirror, refer to page 63, are used to con‐
trol this.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror
Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.
Activating
1.
Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger's side
mirror position.
Interior mirror, manually dimmable
Flip lever
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior
mirror, flip the lever forward.
Turn knob
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.
Seite 62
CONTROLS
Settings
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Interior mirror, automatic dimming
feature
Overview
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Settings
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Seite 63
Settings
CONTROLS
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
The right place for children
Safety information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol‐
lowing actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Always transport children in the rear
seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Transport children younger than 13 years of
age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear
seat in suitable child restraint systems designed
for the age, weight and size of the child. Chil‐
dren 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight, and size.
Safety information
WARNING
The safety belt cannot be fastened cor‐
rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm
without suitable additional child restraint sys‐
tems. The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐
ries, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure chil‐
dren shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable
child restraint systems.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
General information
Before using a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
knee, and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of
front-seat passenger airbags, refer to
page 117.
Seite 64
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Safety information
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
Installing child re‐
straint systems
General information
Pay attention to the specifications of the child
restraint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
In order to faciliate the installation of a back-
facing child restraint system in the rear:
Move the front passenger seat as far up as pos‐
sible before folding down the backrest.
Safety information
WARNING
The protective effect of damaged child
restraint systems or of child restraint systems
exposed to an accident and their fastening sys‐
tems can be limited or lost. A child can e.g.,not
sufficiently restrained, for instance in the event
of an accident or braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Have damaged child restraint systems or of
child restraint systems exposed to an accident
and their fastening systems checked and possi‐
bly replaced by the dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
On the rear seats
In order to facilitate the installation of a back-
facing child restraint system:
Move the front passenger seat as far up as pos‐
sible before folding down the backrest.
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.◀
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐
tomatically, refer to page 117.
Seite 65
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possible
and adjust its height to the highest and thus
best possible position for the belt and to offer
optimal protection in the event of an accident.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the front passenger seat carefully for‐
ward until the best possible belt guide position
is reached.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten
child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
it tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐
turer when installing and using LATCH child re‐
straint fixing systems.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is
restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems
are not correctly engaged, the protective effect
of the LATCH child restraint fixing system can
be limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger
to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐
curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐
straint fixing system fits securely against the
backrest.◀
Seite 66
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Position
Symbol Meaning
The corresponding symbol
shows the mounts for the
lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower an‐
chors are marked with a pair,
2, of LATCH symbols.
For vehicles equipped with a
middle seat:
It is not recommended to use
the inner lower anchors of
standard outer LATCH posi‐
tions to fasten a child restraint
system on the middle seat. Use
the vehicle safety belt instead
for the middle seat.
Before installing LATCH child restraint
fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint fixing
systems
1.
Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint systems with tether strap
Safety information
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
WARNING
If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro‐
tective effect of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or there is none. In particular situations, for
instance braking maneuvers or in case of an ac‐
cident, the rear backrest can fold forward.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the rear backrests are locked.◀
NOTE
The anchors for the upper retaining straps
of child restraint systems are only provided for
these retaining straps. When other objects are
mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There
is a risk of damage to property. Only mount
child restraint systems to the upper retaining
straps.◀
Anchors
The respective symbol shows the an‐
chor for the upper retaining strap. Seats
with an upper top tether are marked
with this symbol. It can be found on the rear
seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
Routing the retaining strap
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Seite 67
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the anchor
1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.
2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retaining
strap between the supports of the head re‐
straint.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the anchor on the rear seat.
4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
ON 5-door models: Lock‐
ing the doors and win‐
dows
Doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.
This locks various functions so that they cannot
be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer
to page 52.
Seite 68
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Driving
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Start/Stop button
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off
and starts the engine.
Steptronic transmission: the en‐
gine starts in selector lever posi‐
tion P or N with the brake pedal pressed when
you press the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: the engine starts with the
clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop but‐
ton is pressed.
Ignition on
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐
ton without stepping on the clutch pedal.
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop
button, and do not press on the brake pedal at
the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in‐
strument cluster light up for a varied length of
time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Ignition off
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐
ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal.
Steptronic transmission: shift to selector lever
position P, press the Start/Stop button again
without stepping on the brake.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Safety measures
The ignition is switched off automatically in the
following situations while the vehicle is station‐
ary and the engine is off:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
low beams are switched on.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started. This function is only available when
the low beams are switched off.
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the
low beams are switched off.
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
with driver's door open and low beams off.
▷ When the front doors are opened if there is
no other person sitting in the front seats.
▷ The low beams switch to parking lights af‐
ter some minutes of no use.
Steptronic transmission with a tap-operated se‐
lector lever, refer to page 83: when switching
off the ignition, the selector lever position P is
Seite 69
Driving
CONTROLS
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
engaged automatically if the selector lever po‐
sition D or R is engaged.
Radio-ready state
General information
In the radio-ready state, certain power con‐
sumers remain ready for operation.
Activating
With the engine running, press the Start/Stop
button.
If the engine is not running and the ignition is
switched on: the system automatically activates
radio-ready state when the door is opened if
the lights are switched off or the daytime run‐
ning lights are switched on.
The radio-ready state remains active if, for in‐
stance the ignition is automatically switched off
for the following reasons:
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
▷ When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights.
Switching off automatically
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐
cally in the following situations:
▷ If the driver's or front passenger door is
opened when exiting the vehicle, with the
engine switched off manually.
▷ If the ignition is switched off manually with
the Start/Stop button.
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central
locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
Starting the engine
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain pollutants which are colorless and odorless.
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accu‐
mulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger
to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure
sufficient ventilation.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.◀
NOTE
In the case of repeated starting attempts
or repeated starting in quick succession, the
fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
The catalytic converter can overheat. There is a
risk of damage to property. Avoid repeated
starting in quick succession.◀
Steptronic transmission
Starting the engine
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Seite 70
CONTROLS
Driving
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Manual transmission
Starting the engine
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐
tral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Engine stop
Safety information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol‐
lowing actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.◀
Steptronic transmission
Switching off the engine
1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the
parking brake.
2. Engage selector lever position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
Manual transmission
Switching off the engine
1.
With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at traf‐
fic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
engine starts automatically for driving off.
After every start of the engine using the Start/
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
the last selected state, refer to page 73. When
the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it is avail‐
able when the vehicle is traveling faster than
about 3 mph/5 km/h.
Seite 71
Driving
CONTROLS
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Depending on the selected driving mode, refer
to page 136, the system is automatically acti‐
vated or deactivated.
Engine stop
Functional requirements
The engine is switched off automatically during
a stop under the following conditions:
Manual transmission:
▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is
not pressed.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
Steptronic transmission:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while
the vehicle is stopped.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
In order to be able to release the brake pedal,
engage the selector lever in position P. The en‐
gine remains off.
To continue driving depress the brake pedal.
When a gear is engaged, the engine starts au‐
tomatically.
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The display indicates that the
Auto Start/Stop function is ready
for an Automatic engine start.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated
or cooled to the required level.
▷ The engine is not yet at operating tempera‐
ture.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ The hood is unlocked.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position R, N
or M/S.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ Manual transmission: clutch pedal is
pressed.
▷ Steptronic transmission: by releasing the
brake pedal.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Seite 72
CONTROLS
Driving
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
Functional limitations
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
when the air conditioning is switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from selec‐
tor lever position D to R, N or M/S.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from selec‐
tor lever position P to R, N, D or M/S.
▷ The vehicle begins rolling.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on.
▷ Manual transmission: low brake vacuum
pressure; this can occur, for instance if the
brake pedal is depressed a number of times
in succession.
Switching the system on/off
Using the button
Press button.
▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐
tivated.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, for instance
when leaving it.
Steptronic transmission:
1.
Engage selector lever position P.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
3. Set the parking brake.
Manual transmission:
1.
Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐
sons, for instance if no driver is detected.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches
off the engine automatically. A Check Control
message is displayed. It is possible to continue
driving. Have the system checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Seite 73
Driving
CONTROLS
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Parking brake
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.◀
Applying
The lever automatically engages after being
pulled up.
The indicator light lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Lower light: indicator light in Canadian
models
If for once use during driving is required, en‐
gage the parking brake slightly and hold the
button down.
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐
tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically
while coasting, if traffic conditions permit.
The brake lights will not light up if the parking
brake is set.
Releasing
Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide
the lever down.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Using turn signals
Press the lever past the resistance point.
Canada: the lever returns into its starting posi‐
tion after actuation. To switch off manually,
slightly tap the lever to the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
Seite 74
CONTROLS
Driving
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
3. "Triple turn signal"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Malfunction
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when
the wipers are in the folded away state and the
wipers are folded in when switching on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Intermittent operation or rain sensor, posi‐
tion 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper sys‐
tem switched on: when travel continues, the
wipers resume at their previous speed.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
Seite 75
Driving
CONTROLS
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain
sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is
preset.
Safety information
NOTE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀
Activating
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐
tion, arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
Deactivating
Press the lever back into the standard position.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Windshield washer system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the
washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀
NOTE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
use the washer system when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty.◀
Seite 76
CONTROLS
Driving
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles
The washer jets are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Rear window wiper
Overview
Switching on the rear window wiper
Turn the outer switch upward.
▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse
gear is engaged, the system switches to
continuous operation.
Clean the rear window
Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.
▷ In resting position: turn the switch down‐
ward, arrow 3. The switch automatically re‐
turns to its resting position when released.
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch fur‐
ther, arrow 2. The switch automatically re‐
turns to its intermittent position when re‐
leased.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-out position enables the wipers to be
folded away from the windshield.
General information
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or un‐
der frosty conditions, for instance.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when
the wipers are in the folded away state and the
wipers are folded in when switching on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Folding away the wipers
1.
Switch the ignition on and off again.
Seite 77
Driving
CONTROLS
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
2. Press and hold the wiper level down, until
the wipers stop in a close to vertical posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1.
Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
Canada: wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when
the wipers are in the folded away state and the
wipers are folded in when switching on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Switching on
Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance
point.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
beyond the resistance point.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Seite 78
CONTROLS
Driving
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
down twice.
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed:
press down once.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain
sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is
preset.
Safety information
NOTE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀
Activating/deactivating
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started.
If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: the
LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper opera‐
tion is deactivated.
During trip interruption with the rain sensor
switched on: if the trip is resumed within ap‐
prox. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automati‐
cally activated again.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Seite 79
Driving
CONTROLS
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Windshield washer system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the
washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀
NOTE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
use the washer system when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty.◀
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles
The washer jets are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Rear window wiper
Overview
Switching on the rear window wiper
Turn the outer switch upward.
▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse
gear is engaged, the system switches to
continuous operation.
Clean the rear window
Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.
▷ In resting position: turn the switch down‐
ward, arrow 3. The switch automatically re‐
turns to its resting position when released.
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch fur‐
ther, arrow 2. The switch automatically re‐
turns to its intermittent position when re‐
leased.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-out position enables the wipers to be
folded away from the windshield.
General information
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or un‐
der frosty conditions, for instance.
Seite 80
CONTROLS
Driving
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when
the wipers are in the folded away state and the
wipers are folded in when switching on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Folding away the wipers
1.
Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
onds, until the wipers remain in a nearly
vertical position
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can
be used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the in‐
structions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate
or the equivalent is recommended.◀
Seite 81
Driving
CONTROLS
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
WARNING
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.◀
NOTE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer
fluid for the water-repelling effect on the win‐
dows can lead to damage to the washing sys‐
tem. There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not add silicon-containing additives to the
washer fluid.◀
NOTE
Mixing different windshield washer con‐
centrates or antifreeze can damage the wash‐
ing system. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not mix different windshield washer
concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the informa‐
tion and mixing ratios provided on the contain‐
ers.◀
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
gine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer con‐
centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead
to incorrect readings at temperatures below
+5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Manual transmission
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.◀
NOTE
When shifting to a lower gear, excessive
speeds can damage the engine. There is a risk
of damage to property. When shifting into 5th
or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the
right.◀
Schematic diagram
▷ 1 – 6: forward gears
▷ R: reverse
Seite 82
CONTROLS
Driving
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Shifting
General information
Depending on the engine installation, the en‐
gine speed during a shifting operation is ad‐
justed automatically as required for harmo‐
nious and dynamic gear shifting.
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
To overcome the resistance push the gearshift
lever dynamically to the left and engage re‐
verse gear with a forward shifting movement.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power, for instance in a vehicle wash, or
be pushed.
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out of a
forward gear or reverse.
3. Release the parking brake.
Steptronic transmission
Concept
The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐
tions of an automatic transmission with the
possibility of manual shifting, if needed.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.◀
Selector lever version
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a trans‐
mission with either a latching selector lever or a
tap-operated selector lever is installed.
Transmission with a latching selector
lever
The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D are
selected by moving the selector lever into the
respective selector lever position. The selector
lever engages in the selector lever positions.
Transmission with a tap-operated
selector lever
The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D are
selected by tapping the selector lever forward
Seite 83
Driving
CONTROLS
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
or back. The selector lever automatically re‐
turns to the center position when released.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally, refer to page 84, in certain situations.
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
automatically.
Reverse R
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Neutral N
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without en‐
gine power in selector lever position N, for in‐
stance in vehicle washes, refer to page 86.
Parking position P
General information
Selector lever position, for instance for parking
the vehicle.
The transmission blocks the drive wheels in se‐
lector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐
lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐
hicle may begin to move.
Automatic parking position for a
transmission with a tap-operated selector
lever
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally in situations such as the following:
▷ After the engine is switched off when the
vehicle is in the radio-ready state, refer to
page 70, or when the ignition is switched
off, refer to page 69, while selector lever
position R, D or M/S is engaged.
▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the
driver's door is opened, and the brake
pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary and selector lever position D, M/S or
R is engaged.
▷ After the ignition has been switched off
while selector lever position N is engaged.
Engaging selector lever positions: with
a latching selector lever
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Functional requirements
The selector lever can only be taken out of se‐
lector lever position P if the ignition is on or the
engine is running.
Engaging selector lever position D, N, R,
or P
With the vehicle stationary, depress the brake
pedal before shifting out of selector lever posi‐
tion P or N; otherwise, the shift block will not be
deactivated and the shift command will not be
executed.
A selector lever lock prevents the following
faulty operation:
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever
position P or R.
Seite 84
CONTROLS
Driving
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever
position P into another selector lever posi‐
tion.
1. To release the selector lever lock: with the
brake pedal depressed, press the button on
the front of the selector lever.
2. Move the selector lever into the desired po‐
sition.
Engaging selector lever positions: with
a tap-operated selector lever
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Functional requirements
Only when the brake pedal is depressed is it
possible to change from selector lever posi‐
tion P to another selector lever position.
Depending on the transmission version, the en‐
gine may have to be running too.
Engaging selector lever position D, N, R
A selector lever lock prevents the following
faulty operation:
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever
position R.
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever
position P into another selector lever posi‐
tion.
1. Press and hold the button to release the se‐
lector lever lock.
2. With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly
push the selector lever in the desired direc‐
tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The
selector lever automatically returns to the
center position when released.
Seite 85
Driving
CONTROLS
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Engaging selector lever position P
Press button P.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power for a short distance, for instance
in a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N: with
a latching selector lever
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage
selector lever position N.
5. Release brake.
The vehicle may roll.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able
to change the selector lever position.
Manually unlock the transmission lock, if
needed, refer to page 88.
Engaging selector lever position N: with
a tap-operated selector lever
1.
Start the engine while pressing on the
brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage
selector lever position N.
5. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains switched
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐
played.
The vehicle may roll.
NOTE
Selector lever position P is automatically
engaged when the ignition is switched off.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
switch drive-ready state off in vehicle washes.◀
Irrespective of the ignition, the selector lever
position P is automatically engaged after ap‐
prox. 15 minutes.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able
to change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed, refer to page 89.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Step on the accelerator pedal be‐
yond the resistance point at the full throttle po‐
sition.
Sport program M/S
Concept
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for a sportier driv‐
ing style. The transmission, for instance shifts
up later and the shifting times are shorter.
Seite 86
CONTROLS
Driving
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Activating the sport program
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐
tor lever position D.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for instance S1.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
Ending the Sport program
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Manual mode M/S
Concept
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual
mode.
Activating manual mode
1.
Press the selector lever to the left out of se‐
lector lever position D, arrow 1.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode M/S becomes active and the gear
is changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for instance M1.
Shifting
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
The Steptronic transmission continues shifting
automatically in certain situations, for instance
when certain engine speed limits are reached.
With a tap-operated selector lever: when M2 is
set manually while the vehicle is stationary, the
transmission will no longer shift back to M1.
This shifting behavior is retained until you en‐
gage M1 manually or exit M.
Avoiding automatic upshifting
Once a particular engine speed is attained, M/S
manual mode is automatically upshifted as
needed.
MINI John Cooper Works: once particular en‐
gine speeds are attained, upshifting is not auto‐
matically performed in M/S manual mode.
For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmission,
automatic shift operations are not performed if
one of the following conditions is met:
▷ DSC is deactivated.
▷ TRACTION is activated.
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐
down.
With the appropriate transmission version, the
lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐
taneously activating kickdown and operating
the left shift paddles. This is not possible by
switching briefly via the shift paddles from se‐
lector lever position D to manual mode M/S.
Ending the manual mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
Seite 87
Driving
CONTROLS
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport
transmission
Concept
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
General information
Shifting
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, for instance downshifting is
not possible if the engine speed is too high.
Short-term manual mode
In selector lever position D, actuating a shift
paddle switches into manual mode temporarily.
After conservative driving in manual mode
without acceleration or shifting via the shift
paddles for a certain amount of time, the trans‐
mission switches back to automatic mode.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode as
follows:
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift
paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.
Continuous manual mode
In selector lever position S, actuating a shift
paddle switches into manual mode perma‐
nently.
Shifting
▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ The lowest possible gear can be selected by
pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example P.
Releasing the transmission lock
manually: with a latching selector lever
If the selector lever is locked in selector lever
position P despite the ignition being switched
on, the brake pedal being depressed and the
button on the selector lever being pressed, the
transmission lock can be unlocked manually:
Before unlocking the transmission lock man‐
ually, engage the parking brake forcefully to
prevent the vehicle from rolling away.
1.
Loosen the selector lever sleeve, together
with the lower retaining ring, from the cen‐
Seite 88
CONTROLS
Driving
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
ter console. To do so, pull the retaining ring
upward at the rear edge.
2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connector,
if needed.
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit, refer to page 233, press the
yellow release lever downward, see arrow.
4. Press the button on the front of the selector
lever and move the selector lever back
slightly.
Release the release lever.
5. Bring the selector lever into the desired po‐
sition.
For additional information, see the chapter on
tow-starting and towing.
Releasing the transmission lock
electronically: with a tap-operated
selector lever
General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll‐
ing away.
Engaging selector lever position N
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the
engine.
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter
must audibly start.
3. Press the button on the selector lever, ar‐
row 1, and press and hold the selector lever
into selector lever position N, arrow N, until
selector lever position N is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
A Check Control message is displayed.
4. Release the selector lever.
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
For additional information, see the chapter on
tow-starting and towing.
Steptronic Sport transmission: Launch
Control
Concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐
rounding conditions.
Seite 89
Driving
CONTROLS
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 184, period.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Functional requirements
Launch Control is available as soon as the en‐
gine and transmission are at operating temper‐
ature.
The engine is at operating temperature after an
uninterrupted trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.
Depending on the external temperature and
driving style, the transmission requires an unin‐
terrupted trip of up to 30 miles/50 km in order
to reach the operating temperature required
for Launch Control.
Start with launch control
While the engine is running:
1. Press button and select SPORT with
the MINI Driving Modes switch.
The instrument cluster displays TRACTION
in combination with SPORT. The DSC OFF
indicator light lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the
resistance point at the full throttle position,
kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Repeated use during a trip
After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐
mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes
before Launch Control can be used again.
After using Launch Control
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control again.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
Seite 90
CONTROLS
Driving
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Displays
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Instrument cluster
Overview
1 Tachometer 96
2 Indicator/warning lights
3 Speedometer
4 Fuel gauge 96
5 Display/reset miles 96
6 Electronic displays 92
Seite 91
Displays
CONTROLS
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Electronic displays
1 Driver assistance systems
Messages, for instance Check Control
Time 96
External temperature 96
Selection lists 100
Total miles/trip odometer 96
Onboard Computer 100
2 Selector lever position 83
Gear shift indicator 98
3 MINI Driving Modes switch status 136
Check Control
Concept
The Check Control system monitors functions in
the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
bination of indicator or warning lights and SMS
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may be output
and a SMS text message may appear on the
Control Display.
Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Indicator light flashes or is illuminated:
safety belt on the driver or passenger
side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐
minder can also be activated if objects are
placed on the front passenger seat.
Seite 92
CONTROLS
Displays
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
not working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
Release the parking brake, refer to
page 74.
Approach control warning
Indicator light illuminates: advance
warning is issued, for example when
there is the impending danger of a colli‐
sion or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too
small.
Increase distance.
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the im‐
minent danger of a collision when the vehicle
approaches another vehicle at a relatively high
differential speed.
Intervention by braking or make an evasive
maneuver.
Person warning
If a collision with a person detected in
this way is imminent, the symbol lights
up and a signal sounds.
Orange lights
Active Cruise Control
The number bars shows the selected
distance from the vehicle driving ahead.
Camera-based cruise control, refer to
page 139.
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has
been detected ahead of you.
Indicator light flashes: the conditions
are not adequate for the system to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Braking force boost may not be work‐
ing. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the lon‐
ger braking distance into account.
Have the system immediately checked
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces. The vehi‐
cle is stabilized. Reduce speed and
modify your driving style to the driving circum‐
stances.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
tioned.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
DSC, refer to page 134.
Seite 93
Displays
CONTROLS
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated
or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.
DSC, refer to page 134, and DTC, refer
to page 135.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 123.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator light lights up: the Tire
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire in‐
flation pressure or a flat tire. Follow the
information in the Check Control message.
The indicator light flashes and then continu‐
ously lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure can be detected.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐
set the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 118.
Steering system
Steering system in some cases not
working.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐
ous engine misfiring within a brief period
can seriously damage emission control
components, in particular the catalytic con‐
verter.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
page 232.
Rear fog light
Rear fog light is switched on.
Rear fog light, refer to page 112.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
Turn signal, refer to page 74.
Parking lights, headlight
Parking lights or headlights are
switched on.
Parking lights/low beams, headlight
control, refer to page 109.
Seite 94
CONTROLS
Displays
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are switched on.
Front fog lights, refer to page 112.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off au‐
tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐
uation.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 111.
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It maintains
the speed that was set using the control
elements on the steering wheel.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are switched on.
High beams, refer to page 75.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Continuous display
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions
occur at once, the messages are displayed con‐
secutively.
The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐
onds. After this time, they are displayed again
automatically.
Temporary display
Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐
matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check
Control messages are stored and can be dis‐
played again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
SMS text messages
SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐
bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check
Control message and the meaning of the indi‐
cator/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Symbols
Within the supplementary text, the following
functions can be selected independent of the
check control message.
Seite 95
Displays
CONTROLS
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ Display additional information about
the Check Control message in the
Integrated Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after the ignition is switched
off.
Fuel gauge
The arrow beside the fuel pump
symbol shows which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
Information on refueling, refer to page 198.
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
protect the engine.
Odometer and trip odom‐
eter
Concept
The total number of kilometers driven and the
number of kilometers driven since the last reset
are displayed in the instrument cluster.
Reset the trip odometer
Press the button.
▷ The odometer is displayed
when the ignition is switched
off.
▷ When the ignition is switched
on, the trip odometer is re‐
set.
External temperature
General information
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal
sounds.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Safety information
WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of road. There is a risk
of an accident. Modify your driving style to the
weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
Display
The external temperature is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Time
The time is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The time can be set via the Cen‐
tral Information Display (CID).
Seite 96
CONTROLS
Displays
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Date
The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The date can be set via the Cen‐
tral Information Display (CID).
Range
Safety information
NOTE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured
anymore. There is a risk of damage to property.
Refuel promptly.◀
Display
With a low remaining range:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the Onboard Com‐
puter.
▷ With a dynamic driving style, for instance
taking curves aggressively, the engine func‐
tion is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Displaying the cruising range
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Range"
Current fuel consump‐
tion
Concept
Displays the current fuel consumption. Check
whether you are currently driving in an efficient
and environmentally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Current consumption"
Service requirements
Concept
The function displays the service requirements
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
General information
After the ignition is switched on the instrument
cluster briefly displays available driving distance
or time to the next scheduled maintenance.
A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
ice requirements from your remote control.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the type of service re‐
quired may be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Seite 97
Displays
CONTROLS
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for scheduled
maintenance or a legally man‐
dated inspection is approach‐
ing.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
spections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Adjust the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Gear shift indicator
Concept
The system recommends the most fuel efficient
gear for the current driving situation.
General information
Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐
try-specific version, the gear shift indicator is
active in the manual mode of the Steptronic
transmission and with manual transmission.
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Manual transmission: displaying
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Steptronic transmission: displaying
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
General information
The camera at the base of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic
signs with extra symbols for wet road condi‐
tions, etc., are also detected and compared
with the vehicle's onboard data, such as from
Seite 98
CONTROLS
Displays
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
the rain sensor, and will be displayed depend‐
ing on the situation.
With the navigation system, the system takes
into account the information stored in the navi‐
gation data and also displays speed limits
present on routes without signs.
Without a navigation system, the system is sub‐
ject to limitations imposed by technology. Traf‐
fic signs with speed limitations are detected
and displayed only. Speed limitations due to
entering or exiting towns, highway signs, etc.
are not displayed. Speed limits with extra text
characters are always displayed.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traffic
situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.◀
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Display
Speed Limit Info is displayed via the Onboard
Computer.
Press button on the turn signal lever several
times, if needed.
Speed Limit Info is displayed on the Info Display
in the instrument cluster.
Speed Limit Info
The last speed limit detected.
Without a navigation system the
traffic signals are grayed out af‐
ter curves or longer stretches of
roadway.
With navigation system: Speed
Limit Info is not available.
Without navigation system: no
speed limit or cancellation is de‐
tected.
Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the
Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers or paint.
Seite 99
Displays
CONTROLS
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such
as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed
sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
are detected.
Selection lists
General information
With the buttons on the steering wheel and the
display in the instrument cluster the following
can be displayed or operated:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
Button on the steering
wheel
Function
Move selection up.
Move selection down.
Confirm the selection.
Display
Onboard Computer
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐
cle data in the instrument cluster, such as aver‐
age values.
Calling up information on the Info
Display
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Seite 100
CONTROLS
Displays
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Information is displayed in the Info Display of
the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Info Display
Repeatedly pressing the button
on the turn signal lever calls up
the following information in the
Info Display:
▷ Range.
▷ GREEN Info.
When GREEN Mode is activated.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Current consumption, fuel.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Engine temperature display.
▷ With equipment version with Head-up Dis‐
play and navigation:
Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ With equipment version with Head-up Dis‐
play and navigation:
Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Speed Limit Info.
▷ Speed.
The unit of some information can be changed.
Setting units, refer to page 104.
Selecting information
You can select what information from the On‐
board Computer is to be displayed on the Info
Display of the instrument cluster.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. Select the desired information.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
The range is calculated based on your driving
style over the last 20 miles/30 km.
GREEN info
The achieved range extension may be dis‐
played as a bonus range.
Average fuel consumption
This is calculated for the period while the en‐
gine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
Onboard Computer.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Seite 101
Displays
CONTROLS
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Engine temperature display
Displays the current engine temperature, based
on a combination of coolant and engine oil
temperature. As soon as the optimum operat‐
ing temperature has been attained, the indica‐
tor is in the center position.
If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en‐
gine, become too hot, a Check Control message
is displayed too.
When the engine temperature is too
high, a red indicator light is displayed.
When the engine oil temperature is too
high, a red indicator light is displayed.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 229.
With equipment version with Head-up
Display and navigation: distance to
destination
The distance remaining to the destination is
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
gation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
With equipment version with Head-up
Display and navigation: time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a
destination is entered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
Onboard Computer on the Control
Display
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐
cle data on the Control Display, such as average
values.
General information
The vehicle features two types of Onboard
Computers.
▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as the
fuel consumption, are displayed. The values
can be reset individually.
▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an over‐
view of a certain distance and can be reset
as often as necessary.
Calling up the Onboard Computer or trip
computer
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the Onboard Computer
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info"
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
4. "Yes"
Resetting the trip computer
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has come
to a standstill.
Driving Excitement
Concept
On the Control Display, sport instruments can
be displayed, and the vehicle state can be
checked before the use of the SPORT program.
Seite 102
CONTROLS
Displays
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Sport instruments
General information
On the Control Display, values for power and
torque are displayed.
Displaying sport instruments
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Driving Excitement"
3. "Sports instruments"
Via MINI Driving Modes switch:
1.
Activate SPORT.
2. "Driving Excitement"
3. "Sports instruments"
Vehicle state
The following vehicle and surrounding area
data is automatically checked and evaluated in
succession:
▷ Range.
▷ Engine temperature.
▷ External temperature.
▷ SPORT program state.
Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle state is
displayed.
Checking vehicle state
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Driving Excitement"
3. "Vehicle and surroundings"
Via MINI Driving Modes switch:
1.
Activate SPORT.
2. "Driving Excitement"
3. "Vehicle and surroundings"
Speed warning
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
cause a warning to be issued.
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
exceeds the set speed limit again, after it has
dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
speed warning
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired speed
warning is displayed.
5. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the Controller.
Setting your current speed as the speed
warning
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the Controller.
Seite 103
Displays
CONTROLS
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Settings on the Control
Display
Time
Setting the time
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
5. Press the Controller.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
7. Press the Controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
Date
Setting the date
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed.
5. Press the Controller.
6. Make the settings for the month and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Language
Setting the language
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 29.
Units of measurement
Setting the units of measurement
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
distance and temperature:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Brightness
Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness at night"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the Controller.
Seite 104
CONTROLS
Displays
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
LED ring on the central
instrument cluster
Concept
The LED ring displays light animations to repre‐
sent specific functions.
Basic displays
Basic functions, for instance the tachometer,
can be set to be displayed continually if so de‐
sired.
Event displays
Functions that are only displayed temporarily,
for instance the volume or temperature set‐
tings, can be set as event displays.
Several vehicle assistance functions can also be
displayed on the LED ring. This display corre‐
sponds with the displays of the function in the
respective display.
Example: tachometer
Like the tachometer in the instrument cluster,
the light animations of the tachometer's basic
display show the current RPMs and the respec‐
tive RPM warning thresholds.
Display
▷ Arrow 1: current RPM.
▷ Arrow 2: prewarning field.
▷ Arrow 3: warning field.
Switching on/off LED ring
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Settings"
2. "Center Instrument"
3. "Center Instrument"
Adjusting the LED ring
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Center Instrument"
3. "Basic display" or "Event display"
4. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
The brightness can be adjusted when night
lighting is active in the instrument cluster.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Center Instrument"
3. "Brightness at night"
4. Turn the Controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Head-up Display
Concept
This system projects important information into
the driver's field of vision, for instance the
speed.
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road.
Seite 105
Displays
CONTROLS
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
General information
Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-
up Display. For additional information, see the
chapter on care.
Safety information
WARNING
When extending and retracting the pro‐
jection screen of the Head-up Display, body
parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
projection screen is clear during opening and
closing.◀
NOTE
The Head-up Display consists of sensitive
components that can easily be scraped or dam‐
aged. There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not place any objects on the Head-up Display,
attach to system components or plug into the
system. Do not move the moving parts man‐
ually.◀
Overview
Switching the Head-up Display on/off
When switching on, the projection lens of the
Head-up Display is extended. When switching
off, the projection lens of the Head-up Display
is retracted again.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Head-Up Display"
Display
Overview
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation system.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the Controller.
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐
tionally influenced using the instrument light‐
ing, refer to page 113.
Seite 106
CONTROLS
Displays
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Adjusting the height
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired height
is reached.
5. Press the Controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Setting the rotation
The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Rotation"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired setting
is selected.
5. Press the Controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
John Cooper Works: sport displays in
the Head-up Display
General information
The sport displays in the Head-up Display assist
with a sporty driving style.
Switching on
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. "Sport displays"
With navigation system: if the sport displays are
switched on, no navigation content will be dis‐
played on the Head-up Display.
Display
1 Speed
2 Shift point indicator
3 Gear display
4 Current engine speed
5 Warning field, speed
Shift point indicator
Concept
Shift point indicator in the Head-up Display in‐
dicates the optimum shifting point. Thus, with a
sporty driving style, the best possible vehicle
acceleration is achieved.
Seite 107
Displays
CONTROLS
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Functional requirements
▷ Steptronic Sport transmission:
Manual mode M/S and, if necessary, Dy‐
namic Traction Control DTC are activated.
▷ Press the accelerator pedal all the way
down.
Display
Successive gray illuminated fields indicate the
upcoming shift moment.
Shift up immediately when the red fields light
up.
When the permitted maximum speed is
reached, all shift point indicators flash.
When the maximum speed is exceeded, the
supply of fuel is interrupted in order to protect
the engine.
Seite 108
CONTROLS
Displays
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Lights
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel.
Symbol Function
Rear fog light.
Front fog lights.
Automatic headlight control.
Cornering light.
Symbol Function
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Parking lights, low
beams and roadside
parking lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when the ignition
is switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐
ods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
charged and it would then be impossible to
start the engine.
When parking, switch on the one-sided road‐
side parking light, refer to page 110.
Low beams
Position of switch:
The low beams light up when the ignition is
switched on.
Seite 109
Lights
CONTROLS
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Canada: roadside parking light
Concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With radio-ready state switched off, press the
lever either up or down past the resistance
point for approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Welcome lights and
headlight courtesy de‐
lay feature
Welcome lights
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the
ambient brightness, individual light functions
may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is
unlocked.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch:
,
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome lights"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlight flasher is switched on after the vehi‐
cle's radio-ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway lighting:"
4. Set length of time.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Automatic headlight
control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, for instance in tunnels, in twilight or if
there is precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
Activating
Position of switch:
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is il‐
luminated when the low beams are switched
on.
Seite 110
CONTROLS
Lights
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot serve
as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under
these conditions, you should always switch on
the lights manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
Position of switch:
, ,
The daytime running lights light up when the
ignition is switched on. After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐
tion .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
Settings are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently used.
Cornering light
General information
Position of switch:
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering
light is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
The cornering light is automatically switched on
depending on the steering angle or the use of
turn signals.
Adaptive headlight
range control
The adaptive headlight range control compen‐
sates for acceleration and braking operations in
order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to
achieve optimum illumination of the roadway.
High-beam Assistant
Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation.
General information
The assistant ensures that the high beams are
switched on, whenever the traffic situation al‐
lows. In the low speed range, the high beams
are not switched on by the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, for instance in towns
and cities.
The high beams can be switched on and off at
any time as usual.
Seite 111
Lights
CONTROLS
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch, depending on the vehicle
equipment: ,
Press and hold button on signal lever.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on.
The headlights are automatically switched be‐
tween low beams and high beams.
The blue indicator light in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 75.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press
the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver's personal judgment of
when to use the high beams. In situation that
require this, therefore switch off manually.
The system is not fully functional in the follow‐
ing situations, and driver intervention may be
necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Fog lights
Front fog lights
Concept
The front fog lights work alongside the low
beams to illuminate a wider area of the road‐
way.
Functional requirement
The low beams must be switched on before
switching on the front fog lights.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The green indicator light lights up if
the front fog lights are switched on.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to
page 110, is activated, the low beams will
come on automatically when you switch on the
front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
Rear fog light
Functional requirement
The low beams or the front fog lights must be
switched on before switching on the rear fog
light.
Seite 112
CONTROLS
Lights
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Switching on/off
Press button.
The yellow indicator light lights up
when the rear fog light is switched on.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to
page 110, is activated, the low beams will
come on automatically when you switch on the
rear fog light.
Instrument lighting
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness.
Settings
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and courtesy
lights are controlled automatically.
Thumbwheel for the instrument lighting con‐
trols brightness of some of these features.
Overview
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
3 Ambient light
Switching the interior lights on/off
Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Switching the reading lights on and off
manually
Press button.
The reading lights are located in the front next
to the interior light.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's in‐
terior.
Activating/deactivating
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Ambient:"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Seite 113
Lights
CONTROLS
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Changing color
Push the switch forward or back:
manual color change.
Press the switch forward or backward
and hold for approx. 3 seconds, until
the ambient light illuminates several times: au‐
tomatic color change. Push the switch again to
end color changes.
Setting the brightness
Depending on the equipment, the brightness of
the ambient light can be adjusted via the
thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on
the Control Display.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
Seite 114
CONTROLS
Lights
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Safety
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and the
front passenger by responding to frontal im‐
pacts in which safety belts alone would not pro‐
vide adequate protection.
Side airbag
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Seite 115
Safety
CONTROLS
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐
tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the
likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
impact events.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, for instance in less severe accidents or
rear-end collisions.
Information on optimum effect of the
airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the
airbag system cannot provide protection as in‐
tended and may cause additional injuries due
to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
ger to life. Follow the information on achieving
the optimum protective effect of the airbag
system.◀
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
in the floor area and does not support them
on the dashboard.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐
mals or objects between an airbag and a
person.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, for instance
for GPS devices or mobile phones.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
modify them in any way.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not specifically suited for seats with
integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not place seat cushions or other objects
on the front seats that are not specifically
suited for seats with integrated side air‐
bags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
ties may affect the air bag system; contact MINI
Customer Relations for further information.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Seite 116
CONTROLS
Safety
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
Safety information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk
of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐
nents.◀
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
tion, the airbag system might not trigger as in‐
tended despite the accident severity. There is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag
system checked, repaired, dismantled and
scrapped by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Correct function
When the ignition is switched on, the
warning light in the instrument cluster
lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the operational readiness of the entire airbag
system and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Warning light does not come on when the
ignition is switched on.
▷ The warning light lights up continuously.
Automatic deactivation of the front-
seat passenger airbags
Concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐
sistance.
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are activated or deactivated.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
Safety information
WARNING
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
function, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐
ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐
senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion.
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically determined to be
safe for use on the front passenger seat.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐
tem is to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Seite 117
Safety
CONTROLS
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Indicator light for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbags indicates the operating state of the
front-seat passenger airbags.
The light indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator light lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint
system or when the seat is
empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator light does not light up when,
for instance a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children seated in
a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐
straint systems required by NHTSA at the point
in time when the vehicle was manufactured.
After installing a child restraint system, make
sure that the indicator light for the front-seat
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that
the child restraint system has been detected
and the front-seat passenger airbags are not
activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front-seat passenger airbags very much de‐
pends on the positions of the driver's/front pas‐
senger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long-term, calibrate the front seats as soon
as a relevant Check Control message is dis‐
played. A message also appears on the Control
Display.
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
An appropriate Check Control message is dis‐
played.
1.
Move the respective seat all the way for‐
ward.
2. Move the respective seat forward again.
The seat moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the Check Control message disappears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
the four mounted tires. The system warns you if
Seite 118
CONTROLS
Safety
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
more tires.
General information
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla‐
tion pressure and, depending on the model,
the tire temperature.
With use of the system follow further informa‐
tion found under Tire inflation pressure, refer to
page 202.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset
was performed with the correct tire infla‐
tion pressure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
justed to a new value, a reset was per‐
formed.
▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
Status display
Current status
The system status can be displayed on the Con‐
trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is
active.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"
The current status is displayed.
Tire conditions
General information
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a SMS text message on
the Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning related
to the tire inflation pressures stored during the
last reset.
One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation
pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.
Gray wheels
It may not be possible to identify tire pressure
losses.
Possible causes:
▷ Malfunction.
▷ The system is being reset.
Additonal information
The status control display additionally shows
the current tire inflation pressures. It shows the
actual values read; they may vary depending
on driving style or weather conditions.
Resetting the system
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Reset the tire inflation pressure using
"Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the fol‐
lowing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure
Monitor (TPM)…".
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The resetting
process is completed automatically while driv‐
ing. After successful completion of the reset,
the tires appear in green on the Control Display
and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) active" is dis‐
played.
Seite 119
Safety
CONTROLS
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue the reset resumes automatically.
Messages
General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-flat
tires can maintain limited stability. There is a
risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐
low the information on run-flat tires and con‐
tinued driving with these tires.◀
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
The system has detected a wheel
change, but no reset was done.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Inflation was not carried out accord‐
ing to specifications.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
below the level of the last reset.
Measure
1.
Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Reset the system.
If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure loss.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and drive moderately.
Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas
station, check and correct the tire inflation
pressure in all four tires, if necessary.
3. Reset the system.
If there is a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
trol Display.
Seite 120
CONTROLS
Safety
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 213, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the tire inflation pressure
in all four tires, for instance using the tire
pressure gage of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been reset. In this case, perform the
reset.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
2.
Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or
by changing the wheel.
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this
case, have the electronics checked and re‐
placed at the next opportunity.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been reset. In this case, perform the
reset.
Possible driving range with a depressurized
tire
The possible driving range varies depending on
the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g.,
speed, road conditions, external temperature.
The driving range may be less but may also be
more if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐
ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Seite 121
Safety
CONTROLS
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
differently, potentially leading to conditions
such as the following:
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for in‐
stance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
System limits
Temperature
The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's
temperature.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire in‐
flation pressure.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the
tire temperature falls again.
These circumstances may cause a warning
when temperatures fall very sharply.
Sudden tire pressure loss
The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire
damage caused by external circumstances.
Failure to perform a reset
The system does not function properly if a reset
has not been carried out, for instance a flat tire
is reported though tire inflation pressures are
correct.
Malfunction
The yellow warning light flashes and is
then illuminated continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. It may
not be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics, for
instance an emergency wheel, is mounted:
have it checked by a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
▷ The system was unable to complete the re‐
set. Perform a system reset again.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS
138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As
an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is signifi‐
cantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
Seite 122
CONTROLS
Safety
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Un‐
der-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han‐
dling and stopping ability. Please note that the
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte‐
nance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-in‐
flation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐
mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
mately one minute and then remain continu‐
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as in‐
tended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va‐
riety of reasons, including the installation of re‐
placement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
Concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
tween the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐
ence will be detected and reported as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initial‐
ization was performed with the correct tire
inflation pressure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
justed to a new value, an initialization was
performed.
Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor can
be displayed, for instance whether the RPA is
active.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
The status is displayed.
Initialization required
An initialization must be performed in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been
adjusted.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
Performing initialization
When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
serve as reference values in order to detect a
flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming
the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
Seite 123
Safety
CONTROLS
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Messages
General information
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on, if needed.
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-flat
tires can maintain limited stability. There is a
risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐
low the information on run-flat tires and con‐
tinued driving with these tires.◀
Indication of a flat tire
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 213, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the tire inflation pressure
in all four tires, for instance using the tire
pressure gage of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been reset. In this case, perform the
reset.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
2.
Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or
by changing the wheel.
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this
case, have the electronics checked and re‐
placed at the next opportunity.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Seite 124
CONTROLS
Safety
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
Possible driving range with a depressurized
tire
The possible driving range varies depending on
the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g.,
speed, road conditions, external temperature.
The driving range may be less but may also be
more if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐
ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
differently, potentially leading to conditions
such as the following:
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for in‐
stance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
System limits
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in
all four tires will not be recognized. There‐
fore, check the tire inflation pressure regu‐
larly.
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by ex‐
ternal circumstances cannot be recognized
in advance.
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Intelligent Safety
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system.
The intelligent safety systems can help prevent
an imminent collision.
▷ Approach control warning with City light
braking function, refer to page 126.
▷ Person warning with City light braking func‐
tion, refer to page 129.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traffic
situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
Seite 125
Safety
CONTROLS
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system lim‐
its, warnings or reactions of the system may not
be output or they may be output too late, in‐
correctly, or without justification. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety system
is displayed. The systems are individually
switched off according to their respective
settings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. The individual settings are
stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Approach control warn‐
ing with city light brak‐
ing function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and activates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
A camera at the base of the interior mirror con‐
trols the system.
The approach control warning is available even
if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the approach control warning and
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
tem reactions.
Seite 126
CONTROLS
Safety
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
Objects that the system can detect are taken
into account.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traffic
situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system lim‐
its, warnings or reactions of the system may not
be output or they may be output too late, in‐
correctly, or without justification. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
Seite 127
Safety
CONTROLS
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety system
is displayed. The systems are individually
switched off according to their respective
settings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. The individual settings are
stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via the Central In‐
formation Display (CID).
1.
"Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired warning time on the
Control Display.
The selected warning time is stored for the
driver profile currently in use.
Warning with braking function
Display
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
with a detected vehicle is imminent.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for instance when there
is the impending danger of a collision or the
distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
vention in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to react. During
a warning, the maximum braking force is used.
Prerequisite for the brake booster is sufficiently
quick and sufficiently hard stepping on the
brake pedal. If there is a risk of collision, the
system may assist with braking.When the vehi‐
cle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may
come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: during a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
Seite 128
CONTROLS
Safety
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
The driver may cancel the braking intervention
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk
of damage to property. Follow the information
regarding the system limits and actively inter‐
vene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
the more warnings are displayed. Therefore,
there may also be an excess of premature or
unjustified warnings and reactions.
Person warning with City
light braking function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents with pe‐
destrians.
When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐
sue a warning if there is imminent danger of a
collision with pedestrians and includes a brak‐
ing function.
The camera at the base of the interior mirror
controls the system.
General information
With sufficient brightness, the system warns
about possible collision danger with pedes‐
trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐
prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking
before a collision.
The system reacts to people who are within the
detection range of the system.
Seite 129
Safety
CONTROLS
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traffic
situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system lim‐
its, warnings or reactions of the system may not
be output or they may be output too late, in‐
correctly, or without justification. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Seite 130
CONTROLS
Safety
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective settings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. The individual settings are
stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a signal
sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or
make an evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to react. During
a warning, the maximum braking force is used.
Prerequisite for the brake booster is sufficiently
quick and sufficiently hard stepping on the
brake pedal. If there is a risk of collision, the
system may assist with braking.When the vehi‐
cle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may
come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: during a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
The driver may cancel the braking intervention
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk
of damage to property. Follow the information
regarding the system limits and actively inter‐
vene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
Seite 131
Safety
CONTROLS
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Brake force display
Concept
Additional brake lights indicate emergency
braking to the traffic behind. This can reduce
the risk of a rear-end collision.
General information
▷ During normal brake application, the brake
lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the flash‐
ers additionally light up.
Alertness assistant
Concept
The system can detect decreasing alertness or
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous
trips, for instance on highways. In this situation,
it is recommended that the driver takes a
break.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess one's physical
state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue
may not be detected or not be detected in
time. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure
that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions.◀
Function
The system is switched on each time the engine
is started and cannot be switched off.
After travel has begun, the system monitors
certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that
decreasing alertness or fatigue can be de‐
tected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering
behavior.
▷ Driving conditions, for instance length of
trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break.
Break recommendation
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display with
the recommendation to take a break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
Seite 132
CONTROLS
Safety
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following sit‐
uations, for instance and will either output an
incorrect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a
break during longer trips on highways.
PostCrash – iBrake
Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the vehicle to a halt automatically with‐
out intervention by the driver in certain situa‐
tions. This can reduce the risk of a further colli‐
sion and the consequences thereof.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released au‐
tomatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling.
Harder vehicle braking
It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in cer‐
tain situations to a halt quicker.
To do this, for a short time the braking pressure
applied when stepping on the brake pedal
must be higher than the braking pressure ach‐
ieved by the automatic braking function. This
interrupts automatic braking.
Interrupting automatic braking
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐
ing in certain situations, for instance for an eva‐
sive maneuver.
Interrupt automatic braking:
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
Seite 133
Safety
CONTROLS
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the greatest possible
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by the Antilock Brake System ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐
ing engine speed and by applying brakes to the
individual wheels.
General information
DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐
ditions, for instance:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 135, is a version of the DSC where for‐
ward momentum is optimized.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
When driving with roof load, for instance
with roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety
may not be ensured in driving-critical situations
due to the elevated center of gravity. There is a
risk of accidents or risk of damage to property.
Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability Control
DSC when driving with roof load.◀
Seite 134
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator light for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.
DSC is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
light go out.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
Automatic activation
When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation
occurs in the following situations:
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
▷ When activating cruise control in TRACTION
or DSC OFF mode.
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
Concept
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability
Control where forward momentum is opti‐
mized.
The system ensures maximum headway on
special road conditions, for instance unplowed
snowy roads or loose road surfaces, but with
somewhat limited vehicle stability.
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Drive carefully.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
driving off from loose ground.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
Activating DTC
Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
light go out.
Seite 135
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of the
vehicle.
To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked
individually when a sporty driving style is used.
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol
Concept
The tuning of the suspension can be changed
with the system.
The system offers several different programs.
The programs are selected via the MINI Driving
Modes switch.
Programs
MID/GREEN
Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for
more comfort.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the shock absorb‐
ers for greater driving agility.
MINI Driving Modes
switch
Concept
The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to fine-
tune the vehicle's settings and features. Choose
between three different programs.
Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch will ac‐
tivate the particular program.
Operating the programs
MINI Driving Modes switch Program
SPORT
MID
GREEN
MID
MID provides balanced tuning.
With each starting operation, MID is activated
using the Start/Stop button.
GREEN
Concept
GREEN, refer to page 190, provides consistent
tuning to maximize range.
Activating GREEN
Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward
until GREEN is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Configuring GREEN
Via MINI Driving Modes switch
1.
Activate GREEN.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Configure the program.
This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is
activated.
Via Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "GREEN Mode"
or
1.
"Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure GREEN"
Seite 136
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Configure the program.
This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is
activated.
SPORT
Concept
Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain for
greater driving agility.
With the appropriate equipment, the tuning of
the suspension also changes and SPORT can be
individually configured.
The configuration is stored for the driver profile
currently in use.
Activating SPORT
Press the MINI Driving Modes switch upward
until SPORT is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Configuring SPORT
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
when the display is activated on the Control
Display, the SPORT driving mode can be config‐
ured for individual specifications.
Via MINI Driving Modes switch
1.
Activate SPORT.
2. Select "Configure SPORT".
3. Configure the program.
Via Central Information Display (CID):
SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐
vated:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure SPORT"
This configuration is retrieved when SPORT is
activated.
Configuring driving program
Settings can be made for the following driving
programs in Driving mode:
▷ GREEN, refer to page 136.
▷ SPORT, refer to page 137.
Displays
Program selection
Pressing the MINI Driving Modes
switch displays a list of pro‐
grams, which can be selected.
Selected program
The instrument cluster displays
the selected program.
Display on the Central Information
Display (CID)
Program changes can be displayed on the Cen‐
tral Information Display (CID).
1.
"Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Driving mode info"
Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on uphill
grades. The parking brake is not required.
Driving off with the drive-off assistant
1.
Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
Seite 137
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Servotronic
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power steer‐
ing function.
The system provides the steering force with
more support at low speeds than at higher
ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance,
and makes steering more direct when driving
at faster speeds.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐
ing to the driving program, so that a direct,
sporty feel or a comfortable steering response
is conveyed.
Seite 138
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Camera-based cruise con‐
trol
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using
the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed on
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle accel‐
erates or brakes automatically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained.
The speed is adjusted as far as the given situa‐
tion allows.
The distance can be adjusted in several steps.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respective
speed.
General information
A camera on the interior mirror is used to de‐
tect vehicles driving ahead.
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Risk of accident due to too high speed
differences to other vehicles, for instance in the
following situations:
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving ve‐
hicle.
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 140.
Store/maintain speed, refer to
page 141.
Seite 139
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Button Function
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 140.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 141.
Reduce distance, refer to page 141.
Increase distance, refer to page 141.
Increase speed, refer to page 141.
Reduce speed, refer to page 141.
Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's ser‐
ies, optional features and country specifica‐
tions.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Functional requirements
Speed range
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
The max. speed that can be set is
85 mph/140 km/h.
Active cruise control is paused below approx.
20 mph/30 km/h. The system does not brake to
a stop.
Switching on/off and interrupting cruise
control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
Display in the instrument cluster lights
up.
Display in the instrument cluster lights
up. The current speed is adopted as de‐
sired speed and displayed with symbol.
Cruise control is active and maintains the set
speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.
Interrupting manually
Press button on the steering wheel.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ Manual transmission: when the clutch
pedal is depressed for a few seconds or re‐
leased while a gear is not engaged.
▷ If selector lever position N is set.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated
or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐
vated.
Seite 140
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
▷ If the detection range of the camera is im‐
paired, for instance by soiling, heavy pre‐
cipitation or glare effects from the sun.
▷ If the vehicle in front decelerates below a
speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press
or button in the interrupted state.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the
symbol.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
switched on, if necessary.
The speed can also be stored as follows:
Press button.
Changing the speed
or button: press until the desired speed
is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ or button: each time it is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ or button: each time it is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
or button: hold down to repeat the ac‐
tion.
Adjusting distance
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility. Due to the system limits,
braking can be late. There is a risk of accidents
or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the
traffic situation at all times. Adjust the distance
to the traffic and weather conditions and main‐
tain the prescribed safety distance, possibly by
braking.◀
Reduce distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
The set distance is briefly displayed in
the left part of the instrument cluster.
Increase distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
The set distance is briefly displayed in
the left part of the instrument cluster.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Seite 141
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Calling up stored speed and distance
Press button with the system inter‐
rupted. Cruise control is continued with
the stored values. The selected distance is
briefly displayed in the Info Display.
Switching distance control on/off
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not react to traffic driv‐
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the
stored speed. There is a risk of accidents or risk
of damage to property. Adjust the desired
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as
needed.◀
Switching distance control off
Press and hold this button.
Or:
Press and hold this button.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster lights up.
To switch distance control back on, press one of
the two buttons again briefly.
After changing over distance control, a Check
Control message is displayed.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed and stored speed
In addition to the indicator light, the de‐
sired speed is displayed in the Info Dis‐
play.
▷ Display lights up green: system is active, the
display indicates the desired speed.
▷ Display lights up orange: system is inter‐
rupted, the display indicates the stored
speed.
▷ No display: system is switched off.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Selected distance from the vehicle driving
ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand por‐
tion of the Info Display.
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set automatically after
the system is switched on.
Detected vehicle
Symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for the
system to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Seite 142
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Symbol flashes red and a signal sounds:
Brake and make an evasive maneuver,
if necessary.
The system has been interrupted or dis‐
tance control is temporarily suppressed
because the accelerator pedal is being
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Distance control is temporarily sup‐
pressed because the accelerator pedal
is being pressed; a vehicle was de‐
tected.
Displays in the Head-up Display
The information from Active Cruise Control can
also be displayed in the Head-up Display.
System limits
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not
be detected.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the following
situations:
▷ For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly slow-
moving road users.
▷ For red traffic lights.
▷ For cross traffic.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
▷ Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonworking
lighting at night.
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐
lected distance in certain situations, including if
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system
requests that the driver intervene by braking
and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
Seite 143
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
The system has a limited detection range. Sit‐
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehicle
driving ahead will not be detected or will be
detected very late.
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. If the system decelerates
you may compensate it by briefly accelerating.
After releasing the accelerator pedal the system
is reactivated and controls speed independ‐
ently.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un‐
favorable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
are already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light con‐
ditions:
▷ Wet conditions.
▷ Snowfall.
▷ Slush.
▷ Fog.
▷ Glare.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐
stance by braking, steering or evading.
Engine power
The desired speed may not be maintained on
uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐
tem fails or was automatically deactivated.
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When an object was not correctly detected.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ Up to 20 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
Cruise control
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
General information
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
Seite 144
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet con‐
ditions, or on a loose road surface.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to
property. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 145.
Store speed, refer to page 145.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 145.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 146.
Increase speed, refer to page 145.
Reduce speed, refer to page 145.
Switching on/off and interrupting cruise
control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster lights up.
The current speed is adopted as the de‐
sired speed and is displayed with the
symbol in the instrument cluster.
Cruise control is active and maintains the set
speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
gaged.
▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
rent speed.
▷ If selector lever position N is set.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated
or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐
vated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press or button in the interrupted state.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
Seite 145
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
The stored speed is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
The speed can also be stored as follows:
Press button.
Changing the speed
or button: press until the desired speed
is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ or button: each time it is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ or button: each time it is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
▷ or button: pressing it to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the
button is released, the vehicle maintains its
final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the
resistance point causes the vehicle to accel‐
erate more rapidly.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
Calling up stored speed
Press button on the steering wheel.
The stored speed is reached again and main‐
tained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator light
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator light in the instru‐
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
tem is switched on.
Desired speed and stored speed
The desired speed is displayed together
with the symbol.
▷ Display lights up green: system is
active, the display indicates the de‐
sired speed.
▷ Display lights up orange: system is inter‐
rupted, the display indicates the stored
speed.
▷ No display: system is switched off.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
System limits
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
engine power is insufficient.
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol
Concept
PDC is a support when parking. When you
slowly approach an object in the rear - or also
in the front of the vehicle if the feature is avail‐
able - then the object is reported through:
Seite 146
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐
tances are located in the bumpers.
The maneuvering range, depending on obsta‐
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ By the front middle sensors and the two
corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from
the object.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at ap‐
prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.
▷ When a collision is imminent.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv‐
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and
vehicle surroundings closely and actively inter‐
vene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control is activated, the warning can be
delayed due to physical circumstances. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control
is not yet active.◀
Overview
With front PDC: button in vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
for instance in the bumpers.
Functional requirements
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers, bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when
the engine is running.
The rearview camera also switches on.
▷ With front PDC: when obstacles are de‐
tected behind or in front of the vehicle by
PDC and the speed is slower than approx.
2.5 mph/4 km/h.
Seite 147
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
With front PDC: automatic activation on obsta‐
cle detection can be switched off. Via the Cen‐
tral Information Display (CID):
1. "Settings"
2. "Parking"
3. Select setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
With front PDC: switching on/off
manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
WARNING
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E.g.,
if an object is detected to the left rear of the ve‐
hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
With front PDC: if objects are simultaneously lo‐
cated both in front of and behind the vehicle,
an alternating continuous signal is sounded.
The signal tone is switched off, when selector
lever position P is engaged on vehicles with
Steptronic transmission.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Multimedia", "Radio" or
"Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. "PDC"
5. To adjust: turn the Controller.
6. To store: press the Controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already displayed on the Con‐
trol Display before a signal sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in col‐
ors: red, green and yellow.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
"Rear view camera"
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk
of damage to property. Follow the information
regarding the system limits and actively inter‐
vene, if needed.◀
Seite 148
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in‐
stance coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, for instance from passing vehicles or
loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, wet conditions,
snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
False warnings
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
lowing conditions even though there is no ob‐
stacle within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, for instance in underground
garages.
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for in‐
stance sweeping machines, high pressure
steam cleaners or neon lights.
The malfunction is signaled by a continuous
tone alternating between the front and rear
speakers. As soon as the malfunction due
to other ultrasound sources is no longer
present, the system is again fully functional.
With front PDC: to reduce false alarms, switch
off automatic PDC activation on obstacle detec‐
tion, for instance in vehicle washes; see Switch‐
ing on/off.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Red symbol is displayed, and the range
of the sensors is dimmed on the Control
Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv‐
Seite 149
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and
vehicle surroundings closely and actively inter‐
vene where appropriate.◀
Overview
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly:
button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
necessary, clean the camera lens.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if se‐
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
gine is running.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly:
switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
Switching the view via the Central
Information Display (CID)
With PDC Park Distance Control activated:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems
and trailers that are not connected to a
trailer power socket can lead to malfunc‐
tions.
Activating the assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
Seite 150
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
"Obstacle marking"
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, ob‐
stacles are highlighted.
Pathway lines
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐
age of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering
angle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can be superimposed on
the image of the rearview camera.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Obstacle marking
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, obstacle
markings can be faded into the image of the
rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control.
Parking using pathway and turning
radius lines
1.
Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐
dius lines lead to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
Seite 151
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the Controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the Controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles or high, protruding objects
such as ledges may not be recognized by the
system.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, certain
assistance functions also take into account data
from PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Therefore, do
not estimate the distance from the objects on
the display.
Parking assistant
Concept
This system assists the driver in parking parallel
to the road.
General information
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
steps:
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐
ble parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure.
System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
Seite 152
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
NOTE
The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage
to property. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene where appropriate.◀
The safety information of the PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control applies in addition.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking
spaces are located on the wheel housing.
Functional requirements
Ultrasound sensors
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
▷ Gaps behind an object that has a min.
length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
3.3 ft/1.0 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking
▷ Doors and tailgate are closed.
▷ The parking brake is released.
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the
driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
must be set.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button
Press park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Seite 153
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Indicator on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but not
activated.
The system is activated.
Parking space search and system status
▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side of
the vehicle image; the parking assistant is
activated and the parking space search is
active.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
lighted.
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
been taken over by system.
▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant
Parking
1.
Press the park assistance button or
shift into reverse gear to switch on the
parking assistant, refer to page 153. Acti‐
vate the parking assistant, if needed.
Parking assistant is activated.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed
of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a
distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the display, refer to page 154.
3. Follow the instructions on the display.
The best possible parking position will
come after gear change on the stationary
vehicle - wait for the automatic steering
wheel move.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the display.
4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ Press park assistance button.
▷ "Parking Assistant"
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
takes over steering.
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the
instruction on the display.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
Seite 154
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road
surfaces.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays
clearances that are too small.
▷ When switching into other functions of the
radio.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resuming
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued, if needed.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
page 153, and follow the instructions on the
display.
Switching off
The system can be switched off as follows:
▷ Press park assistance button.
▷ Switching off the ignition.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk
of damage to property. Follow the information
regarding the system limits and actively inter‐
vene, if needed.◀
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assistance
in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
of a port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in‐
stance coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, for instance from passing vehicles or
loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, wet conditions,
snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
▷ The parking assistant may identify parking
spaces that are not suitable for parking.
Seite 155
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Tire size
The parking position may vary depending on
the tire size.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 156
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Climate control
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Interior air quality
The air quality inside the vehicle is improved by
an emissions-tested interior, a microfilter, and a
climate-control system for regulating tempera‐
ture, air flow, and recirculated-air mode.
In addition there are other functions which de‐
pend on the vehicle's equipment, for instance
microfilter/activated-charcoal filter, automatic
climate control, and parked-car ventilation.
Air conditioner
1 Air distribution settings
2 Air flow
3 Temperature
4 Seat heating, right 57
5 Air conditioning
6 Recirculated-air mode
7 Rear window defroster
8 Windshield defroster
Seite 157
Climate control
CONTROLS
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
9 Seat heating, left 57
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Set any air flow.
Switching off
Turn the wheel for air flow all the
way to the left.
Temperature
Concept
The system heats or cools, depending on the
set temperature.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐
tioning switched on.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The air conditioner produces condensation wa‐
ter, refer to page 187, that will exit from below
the vehicle.
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air flow within the
vehicle.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked.
To prevent window condensation, recirculated-
air mode switches off automatically after a cer‐
tain amount of time, depending on the external
temperature.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-
air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
Seite 158
CONTROLS
Climate control
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Operation
Turn the ring to set the desired
air flow.
The higher the air flow, the more
effective the heating or cooling
will be.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐
duced automatically to save battery power.
Controlling the air distribution manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Operation
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
sired program or the desired in‐
termediate setting.
▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Make the following settings to defrost the win‐
dows and remove condensation:
▷ Direct the air distribution onto the win‐
dows.
▷ Increasing the air flow.
▷ Increase the temperature.
▷ Switch on the air conditioning if needed.
Windshield defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The front window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
When GREEN Mode is activated, the heater out‐
put is reduced.
Microfilter
In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 231.
Seite 159
Climate control
CONTROLS
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Automatic climate control
1 Temperature, left
2 Display
3 Air flow, AUTO intensity
4 AUTO program
5 Air distribution, manual
6 Display
7 Temperature, right
8 Seat heating, right 57
9 Maximum cooling
10 Air conditioning
11 Recirculated-air mode
12 Rear window defroster
13 Windshield defroster
14 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
sation
15 Seat heating, left 57
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Set any air flow.
Switching off
Turn wheel for air flow to the left
until the control switches off.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
Seite 160
CONTROLS
Climate control
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
by using the maximum cooling or heating
power, and then keeps it constant.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate con‐
trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐
tioning switched on.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The air conditioning is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water, refer to page 187, develops
and drains underneath the vehicle. This is nor‐
mal.
Maximum cooling
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode.
General information
The function is available with external tempera‐
tures beyond approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
engine running.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
active.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on.
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
optimum air flow and air circulation mode.
AUTO program
Concept
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
program switched on.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity and outside influences, the air is di‐
rected to the windshield, side windows, upper
body, and into the floor area.
The following features are switched on auto‐
matically with the AUTO program:
▷ The air conditioning, refer to page 161.
To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribution.
Intensity
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
matic intensity control can be changed.
Seite 161
Climate control
CONTROLS
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Turn the ring to set the desired
intensity from soft to intensive.
The set intensity is displayed via the position of
the illuminated LED segment.
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air flow within the
vehicle.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked.
To prevent window condensation, recirculated-
air mode switches off automatically after a cer‐
tain amount of time, depending on the external
temperature.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-
air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
General information
To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO
program first.
Operation
Turn the ring to set the desired
air flow.
The manually adjusted air flow is displayed via
illuminated LED segments.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Controlling the air distribution manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows and floor area.
▷ Windows.
▷ Windows and upper body region.
▷ Upper body region.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win‐
dows.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Seite 162
CONTROLS
Climate control
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on.
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win‐
dows.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
active.
If there is window condensation, switch on the
air conditioning too.
Windshield defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The front window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
When GREEN Mode is activated, the heater out‐
put is reduced.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 231.
Ventilation
Setting
The air flow directions can be individually ad‐
justed:
▷ Direct ventilation:
The air flow is directly pointed onto the per‐
son. The air flow heats or cools noticeably,
depending on the adjusted temperature.
▷ Indirect ventilation:
If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air
is directly routed into the car's interior.
Front ventilation
▷ Turn knob for continuous opening and clos‐
ing of the vents.
▷ Swivel the vents to alter the direction of the
vent flow, arrows.
Parked-car ventilation
Concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the car's
interior and lowers its temperature, if needed.
General information
The parked-car ventilation can be switched on
and off directly or by using two preset activa‐
tion times. The system remains switched on for
30 minutes.
The parked-car ventilation system is operated
via the Central Information Display (CID).
Functional requirements
▷ Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-ready
state.
▷ Direct operation or preset activation time:
does not depend on external temperature.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the
vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus,
limit the maximum activation time to save
Seite 163
Climate control
CONTROLS
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
the vehicle battery. The system will be
available again after the engine is started or
after a short trip.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate comf. ventilation"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the activation time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the activation time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the activation time is acti‐
vated.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been switched
on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
Seite 164
CONTROLS
Climate control
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Integrated Universal Re‐
mote Control
Concept
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of
remote-controlled systems, such as garage
door drives, barriers, or lighting systems. The
integrated Universal Remote Control replaces
up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To op‐
erate the remote control, the buttons on the in‐
terior mirror must be programmed with the de‐
sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for
the particular system is required in order to
program the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, such as the ga‐
rage door, using the integrated Universal Re‐
mote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐
tem to be controlled, the system is gen‐
erally compatible with the integrated Universal
Remote Control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Overview
1 LED
2 Programmable keys
3 Hand-held transmitters of the system
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
Seite 165
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
proximately 20 seconds until the LED on
the interior mirror flashes. This erases all
programming of the buttons on the interior
mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in‐
ches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of
the interior mirror. The required distance
depends on the hand-held transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button
of the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter and the button to be program‐
med on the interior mirror. The LED on the
interior mirror will begin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐
rior mirror has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at least
60 seconds, change the distance between
the interior mirror and the hand-held trans‐
mitter and repeat the step. Several more
attempts at different distances may be nec‐
essary. Wait at least 15 seconds between
attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held trans‐
mitter button for 2 seconds.
6.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the interior
mirror buttons.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the sys‐
tem to be controlled features a rolling code
radio system.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press the
programmed button on the interior mirror lon‐
ger. If the LED on the interior mirror starts
flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for
2 seconds, the system features a rolling code
radio system. Flashing and continuous illumina‐
tion of the LED will repeat for approximately
20 seconds.
For systems with a rolling code radio system,
the integrated Universal Remote Control and
the system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
person.
Synchronizing the universal remote control
with the system:
1.
Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
and then release it. If necessary, repeat this
step up to three times in order to finish syn‐
chronization. Once synchronization is com‐
plete, the programmed function will be car‐
ried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to
be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐
mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐
prox. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from
the buttons of the interior mirror. The re‐
quired distance depends on the hand-held
transmitter.
Seite 166
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the interior
mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The LED
flashing faster indicates that the button on
the interior mirror has been programmed.
The system can then be controlled by the
button on the interior mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at most
60 seconds, change the distance and re‐
peat the programming starting with step 4.
Several more attempts at different distan‐
ces may be necessary. Wait at least 15 sec‐
onds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held trans‐
mitter button for 2 seconds.
Operation
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, such as the ga‐
rage door, using the integrated Universal Re‐
mote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior mir‐
ror while the engine is running or when the ig‐
nition is started. To do this, hold down the but‐
ton within receiving range of the system until
the function is activated. The interior mirror
LED stays lit while the wireless signal is being
transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐
terior mirror simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror
flashes rapidly. All stored functions will be de‐
leted. The functions cannot be deleted individ‐
ually.
Digital compass
Overview
1 Control button
2 Mirror display
Mirror display
The point of the compass is displayed in the
mirror when driving straight.
Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by pressing
the control button with a pointed object, such
as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The following setting options are displayed in
succession, depending on how long the control
button is pressed:
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting.
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Seite 167
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
fer to World map with compass zones.
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set
compass zone appears in the mirror.
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the
number of the compass zone that corre‐
sponds with your location appears in the
mirror.
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐
pass is ready for use again after approximately
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
event of the following:
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does
not change despite changing the direction
of travel.
▷ Not all points of the compass are displayed.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
objects or overhead power lines near the
vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
drive around in a circle.
2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on
the display. Next, drive in a complete circle
at least once at a speed of no more than
4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful,
the "C" is replaced by the points of the
compass.
Seite 168
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Left/right-hand steering
The digital compass is already set for right or
left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control but‐
ton again to switch between English "E" and
German "O".
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐
mately 10 seconds.
Sun visor
Glare shield
To provide protection against glare, fold the
sun visor down or pivot it to the side.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover.
When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting
switches on.
Ashtray/cigarette
lighter
Overview
The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup
holders, the cigarette lighter above it in the
center console.
Ashtray
In order to empty the ashtray, remove the ash‐
tray from the cup holder.
Cigarette lighter
Safety information
WARNING
Contact with the hot heating element or
the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is a risk of fire and
injuries. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its
handle. Make sure that children do not use the
cigarette lighter and burn themselves.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Operation
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved as soon as it pops back
out.
Sockets
Concept
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the ignition is
switched on or the engine is running.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Seite 169
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Safety information
WARNING
Devices and cables in the unfolding area
of the airbags, such as portable navigation de‐
vices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or
be thrown around in the car's interior during
unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that devices and cables are not in the airbag's
area of unfolding.◀
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is a
risk of damage to property. Only connect bat‐
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.◀
In the center console
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
In the cargo area
The socket is located on the right side in the
cargo area.
USB interface/AUX-IN port
Concept
Mobile devices with USB port can be connected
to the USB interface.
A mobile audio device, for instance a MP3
player, can be connected using the AUX-IN
port.
General information
The following devices can be connected:
▷ Mobile phones supported by the USB inter‐
face.
▷ Audio devices with USB port, for instance
MP3 player.
▷ USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32
and exFAT are the recommended formats.
Information about suitable USB storage devices
can be found at www.miniusa.com/connectiv‐
ity.
The following applications are possible:
▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, re‐
fer to page 46.
▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
▷ Adding music files to the music collection
and storing the music collection.
Seite 170
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ Playing videos via USB video.
▷ Loading of software updates.
Overview
The USB interface and the AUX-IN port are lo‐
cated in the center console.
Connecting an external device
Follow the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐
chanical damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB media
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that every device is operable on the
vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high
temperatures; refer to the owner's manual
of the device.
▷ Due to the many different compression
techniques, proper playback of the media
stored on the USB storage device cannot be
guaranteed in all cases.
▷ A connected USB storage device will be
supplied with charging current via the USB
interface if the device supports this.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
data, do not charge a USB storage device
via the onboard socket, when it is con‐
nected to the USB interface.
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device
is being used, settings may be required on
the USB storage device, refer to the owner's
manual of the device.
Not compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
▷ MTP devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Seite 171
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose ob‐
jects or devices with a cable connection to the
vehicle in the car's interior.◀
NOTE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Overview
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the car's interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
▷ Compartments in the doors.
▷ Storage compartment in the center arm‐
rest.
▷ Storage compartment in front of the cup
holders.
▷ Clothes hooks
▷ Storage tray in the center console.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.
Glove compartment
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
glove compartment can be thrown into the
car's interior while driving, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately after
using it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Seite 172
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Compartments in the
doors
WARNING
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an accident
or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass
can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not use any breakable objects while driving.
Only stow breakable objects in closed storage
compartments.◀
Center armrest
General information
The center armrest contains a storage compart‐
ment.
Opening
Press button, arrow 1, and open center armrest
upward, arrow 2.
Adjusting the height
Press button, arrow 1, and swing center arm‐
rest upward or downward into the desired
height, arrow 2.
Cup holders
Safety information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the risk of injury in the event of an
accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Use light-weight, unbreakable,
and sealable containers. Do not transport hot
beverages. Do not force objects into the cup
holder.◀
Front
In the center console.
Seite 173
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Rear
For 3-door models: in front of the rear seats
and in the side armrests.
For 5-door models: in front of the rear seats.
Clothes hooks
General information
3-door model: The clothes hooks are located
above the side windows in the rear.
5-door model: The clothes hooks are located
above the rear doors.
Safety information
WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can
obstruct the view while driving. There is a risk
of an accident. When suspending clothing arti‐
cles from the clothes hooks, ensure that they
will not obstruct the driver's view.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of damage to property. Only
hang lightweight objects, for instance clothing
articles, from the clothes hooks.◀
Seite 174
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Cargo area
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Loading
Safety information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally and cause a sudden
drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving charac‐
teristics may be negatively impacted, reducing
lane stability, lengthening the braking distances
and changing the steering response. There is a
risk of an accident. Pay attention to the permit‐
ted load capacity of the tires and never exceed
the permitted gross weight.◀
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose ob‐
jects or devices with a cable connection to the
vehicle in the car's interior.◀
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the car's interior, for instance in
the event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be
hit and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow
and secure objects and cargo properly.◀
NOTE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
age. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo
area.◀
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1.
Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x
150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
Seite 175
Cargo area
CONTROLS
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
On 3-door models
On 5-door models
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
▷ Small and light cargo: secure with ratchet
straps or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
Without storage compartment package: to se‐
cure the cargo there are two lashing eyes, ar‐
row 1, in the cargo area.
With storage compartment package: to secure
the cargo there are six lashing eyes, arrows 1
and 2, in the cargo area.
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo
nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Cargo cover
General information
When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is
raised.
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
Seite 176
CONTROLS
Cargo area
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose ob‐
jects or devices with a cable connection to the
vehicle in the car's interior.◀
Removing
For storing bulky objects the cargo cover can
be removed.
1. Detach the left and right retaining straps at
the tailgate.
2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets on
the left and right.
Installing
1.
Slide the cargo cover forward horizontally
into the two side brackets until it audibly
engages.
2. Attach the left and right retaining straps at
the tailgate.
Storage space under
cargo floor panel
Located under the cargo floor panel on the
right side is a trough for the onboard vehicle
tool kit.
Fold the right side of the cargo floor panel up‐
ward to remove the onboard vehicle tool kit.
Enlarging the cargo
area
Concept
The cargo area can be enlarged as follows:
▷ The rear seat backrests can be folded
down.
▷ The rear seat backrests can be moved into
an upright loading position using the cargo
setting.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts
at a ratio of 60 to 40. The left rear seat backrest
is connected to the center section.
The rear seat backrests can be folded down
from the rear.
Safety information
WARNING
Danger of jamming with folding down the
backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
Seite 177
Cargo area
CONTROLS
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
movement of the rear backrest and the of the
head restraint is clear prior to folding down.◀
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse‐
cured cargo can be thrown into the car's inte‐
rior; for instance, in the event of an accident,
braking or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest
is locked after folding it back.◀
WARNING
With a rear backrest that is not locked,
the protective function of the middle safety belt
is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. If you are using the middle safety
belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
Folding down the rear seat backrest
from the rear
1.
Before the rear seat backrest is folded
down, hook the corresponding safety belt
into the belt buckle on the side.
2. Pull the lever up, arrow 1, and fold the rear
seat backrest forward, arrow 2.
Cargo position
Concept
The rear seat backrests can be moved into an
upright loading position.
Settings
1.
Release the backrest, and tilt it forward.
2. Fold the frame up until it engages.
3. Fold back and engage the rear seat back‐
rest.
Fold back the backrest
Fold up the backrest and press it into the latch.
Make sure that the safety belt is not pinched.
Seite 178
CONTROLS
Cargo area
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Variable cargo area
floor
Concept
With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo
area can be configured corresponding to trans‐
port requirements.
General information
Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer to
page 175.
Removing the cargo floor panel
On 5-door models: To change the position of
the cargo floor panel, first fold up the rear part
of the cargo floor panel.
Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and fold
slightly upward. Next, pull it backward from the
supports.
The cargo floor panel can be removed from the
cargo area above the tail lights.
Lower position
▷ Larger objects can be transported.
▷ Space for smaller objects remains between
the fixed and variable cargo area floor.
Folded up position
Safety information
WARNING
Improper use of the variable cargo floor
panel can lead to a danger of objects flying
about during braking and evasive maneuvers.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property.
▷ Do not use the variable cargo floor panel to
separate the cargo area and car's interior in
the sense of a partition net.
▷ Only use the variable cargo floor panel in
the folded-up position when the backrests
are folded up and locked.
▷ Fold down the variable cargo floor panel
before driving off.
▷ Always secure cargo against shifting, using
straps, belts and lashing eyes, for in‐
stance.◀
Seite 179
Cargo area
CONTROLS
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Fold up the cargo floor panel
Fold up the cargo floor panel in the lower posi‐
tion and push it behind the locks, arrow.
You've reached the maximum cargo height.
Upper position
▷ With the backrests folded down, a long, flat
loading surface is produced.
▷ For 3-door models:
Maximum load in this position:
330 lbs/150 kg.
▷ For 5-door models:
Maximum load in this position:
441 lbs/200 kg.
▷ Space for objects remains between the
fixed and variable cargo area floor.
Seite 180
CONTROLS
Cargo area
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Seite 181
Cargo area
CONTROLS
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
DRIVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to begin working together
smoothly.
The following instructions will help you to ach‐
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Control,
refer to page 89.
Safety information
WARNING
Due to new parts and components, safety
and driver assistance systems can react with a
delay. There is a risk of an accident. After instal‐
ling new parts or with a new vehicle, drive con‐
servatively and intervene early if necessary. Ob‐
serve the break-in procedures of the respective
parts and components.◀
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components above-men‐
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Seite 184
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
Safety information
WARNING
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
cle and can endanger occupants and other traf‐
fic participants or damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Do not drive with the
tailgate open.◀
Driving with the tailgate open
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust gas system
WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera‐
tures can occur underneath the vehicle body,
for instance caused by the exhaust gas system.
If combustible materials, such as leaves or
grass, come in contact with hot parts of the ex‐
haust gas system, these materials can ignite.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Do not remove the heat shields in‐
stalled and never apply undercoating to them.
Make sure that no combustible materials can
come in contact with hot vehicle parts in driv‐
ing operation, idle or during parking. Do not
touch the hot exhaust gas system.◀
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
WARNING
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
can influence one another. There is radiation
due to the transmission operations of mobile
phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. If possible, in the car's interior
use only mobile phones with direct connections
to an exterior antenna in order to exclude mu‐
tual interference and deflect the radiation from
the car's interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
General information
When driving through water, follow the follow‐
ing:
▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Safety information
NOTE
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
transmission. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. When driving through water, do not ex‐
ceed the maximum indicated water level and
the maximum speed for driving through wa‐
ter.◀
Seite 185
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Braking safely
General information
The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that
require such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
fort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
Objects in the area around the pedals
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐
not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can
be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,
gently press the brake pedal every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
traffic.
The heat generated during braking dries brake
discs and brake pads and protects them against
corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
General information
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking effort. Other‐
wise, the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
needed.
Safety information
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk
of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress
on the brake system.◀
WARNING
In idle state or with the engine switched
off, safety-relevant functions, for instance en‐
gine braking effect, braking force boost and
steering assistance, are restricted or not availa‐
ble at all. There is a risk of an accident. Do not
drive in idle state or with the engine switched
off.◀
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are increased by the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally this cannot be corrected.
Seite 186
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Condensation water under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops and collects under‐
neath the vehicle.
Ground clearance
NOTE
If ground clearance is insufficient, there
might be contact with the front or rear spoiler,
for instance when driving over curbs or enter‐
ing into underground vehicle parking garages.
There is a risk of damage to property. Ensure
that there is sufficient ground clearance availa‐
ble.◀
Roof-mounted luggage
rack
General information
Installation only possible with roof rack.
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass sun‐
roof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance
using ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Rear luggage rack
General information
Installation only possible with rear luggage rack
preparation.
Rear racks are available as special accessories.
Securing
COOPER
COOPER S
Seite 187
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
The fixing points, arrow 1, and the socket, ar‐
row 2, are located below the covers in the
bumper.
Remove the covers before installing the rear
luggage rack.
Loading
Because rear luggage racks raise the vehicle's
center of gravity when loaded, they have a ma‐
jor effect on vehicle handling and steering re‐
sponse.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved axle load and
the approved gross vehicle weight.
▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration
and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐
tly.
Power consumption
Before starting to drive, check the function of
the rear luggage rack lights.
The rear luggage rack lights must not consume
more than:
▷ Turn signals: 42 watts per side.
▷ Rear lights: 50 watts per side.
▷ Brake lights: 84 watts in total.
▷ Rear fog lights: 42 watts in total.
▷ Backup light: 42 watts in total.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
This wear is not covered by the warranty. The
vehicle is not designed for use in motor sports
competition.
Seite 188
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
The vehicle contains advanced technologies for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sion values.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
ing style and regular maintenance can influ‐
ence fuel consumption and environmental im‐
pact.
Remove unnecessary
cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove roof-mounted or rear luggage racks
which are no longer required following use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and
glass sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
raises fuel consumption.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, for instance tire size may influence fuel
consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without de‐
lay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Seite 189
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Avoid high engine speeds
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐
sumption and reduces wear.
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift in‐
dicator, refer to page 98.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a
halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine
during longer stops
Switching off the engine
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for
instance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in
traffic congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle au‐
tomatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐
duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds
of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
road conditions, maintenance or environmental
factors.
Switch off any functions
that are not currently
needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
consume additional fuel, especially in city and
stop-and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
Have maintenance car‐
ried out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to ach‐
ieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
MINI recommends that maintenance work be
performed by a MINI service center.
Also note the MINI maintenance systems, refer
to page 231.
GREEN Mode
Concept
GREEN Mode supports a driving style that saves
on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
gine control and comfort features, for instance
the climate control output, are adjusted.
For Steptronic transmission:
Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
matically decoupled from the transmission in
the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐
tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐
duce fuel consumption. The D selector lever
position remains engaged.
In addition, context-sensitive instructions are
displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐
sumption driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in
the instrument cluster as bonus range.
Seite 190
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
General information
The system includes the following MINIMALISM
functions and MINIMALISM displays:
▷ GREEN bonus range, refer to page 191.
▷ GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to
page 192.
▷ GREEN climate control, refer to page 191.
▷ MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to page 194.
▷ Coasting driving condition, refer to
page 193.
Activating GREEN Mode
Press the MINI Driving Modes
switch downward until GREEN is
displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Configuring GREEN
Via MINI Driving Modes switch
1.
Activating GREEN Mode.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Select the desired setting.
Via the Central Information Display
(CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "GREEN Mode"
3. Select the desired setting.
Or
1.
"Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure GREEN"
4. Select the desired setting.
Activating/deactivating the functions
The following functions can be activated/deac‐
tivated:
▷ "GREEN speed warning"
▷ "GREEN climate control"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
GREEN Limit
▷ Activate the GREEN Limit:
"GREEN speed warning":
A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of the
set GREEN Limit is exceeded.
▷ Setting the speed for the GREEN Limit:
"Tip at:"
Select the desired speed.
GREEN climate control
Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
That is, it is possible to deviate slightly from the
set temperature or to heat or cool the car's in‐
terior more slowly, to economize on fuel con‐
sumption.
The power output to the seat heater and exte‐
rior mirror is reduced.
GREEN potential savings
Shows potential savings with the current set‐
tings in percentages.
Display in the instrument cluster
GREEN bonus range
A modified driving style helps
you extend your driving range.
This may be displayed as the bo‐
nus range in the instrument clus‐
ter.
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
The bonus range is automatically reset every
time the vehicle is refueled.
▷ Green display: efficient driving style.
▷ Gray display: modify driving style, for in‐
stance by backing off the accelerator pedal.
Seite 191
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Efficiency display
A bar display in the instrument
cluster indicates your current
driving efficiency.
Mark in the left area, arrow 1:
display for energy recovered by
coasting or when braking.
Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display when
accelerating.
The efficiency of your driving style is shown by
the position of the mark:
▷ Mark inside the green range: efficient driv‐
ing style.
▷ Mark outside the green range: modify driv‐
ing style, for example by backing off the ac‐
celerator.
GREEN tip, driving instruction
The GREEN tip indicates that your driving style
can be modified to be more fuel efficient, for
example by backing off the accelerator.
Activating the efficiency display and
GREEN tips
The efficiency display and GREEN tips appear in
the instrument cluster when GREEN Info is acti‐
vated.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "GREEN Info"
GREEN tip, symbols
An additional symbol and text instructions are
displayed.
Symbol Measure
For an efficient driving style, look well
ahead when driving, accelerate con‐
servatively, and delay accelerating.
Reduce speed to the selected GREEN
speed.
Steptronic transmission:
Switch from M/S to D and avoid
manual shift interventions.
Manual transmission:
Follow the shift instructions.
Manual transmission:
Engage neutral for an engine stop.
Indications on the Control Display
Displaying MINIMALISM info
The current efficiency of the functions in GREEN
Mode can be displayed on the Control Display.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "MINIMALISM"
3. "MINIMALISM info"
Information is shown on the following func‐
tions:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Climate control output.
▷ Coasting.
Displaying GREEN tips
"GREEN tips"
Driving instruction and an additional symbol
are displayed.
Seite 192
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Coasting
Concept
The function helps to conserve fuel.
To do this, under certain conditions the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
sion when selector lever position D is set. The
vehicle continues traveling with the engine
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector
lever position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coasting.
As soon as you step on the brake or accelerator
pedal, the engine is automatically coupled
again.
General information
Coasting is a component of the GREEN driving
mode.
Coasting is automatically activated when the
GREEN driving mode is called via the MINI Driv‐
ing Modes switch, refer to page 136.
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use
the function often and supports the fuel-con‐
serving effect of coasting.
Functional requirements
The function is available in the speed range
from approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to
100 mph/160 km/h.
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not
operated.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
▷ With a camera in the area of the interior
mirror: the system does not detect any ve‐
hicles ahead of you.
▷ With the route-ahead assistant: the system
does not detect any obstructive traffic sit‐
uations or routes.
Operation via shift paddles
Concept
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
coasting mode can be influenced with the shift
paddles.
Activating/deactivating coasting via shift
paddles
1.
Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right
shift paddle.
2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the
right shift paddle again.
To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
The bar display below the tach‐
ometer is filled in green and the
mark appears at the zero point.
The tachometer shows the idle
speed.
Indications on the Control Display
The coasting driving condition is displayed in
MINIMALISM Info while driving.
The distance traveled in the coasting driving
condition is indicated by a counter.
Seite 193
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Color code green, arrow 1: distance traveled in
the coasting driving condition. Symbol, arrow 2:
coasting driving condition.
Displaying MINIMALISM info
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "MINIMALISM"
3. "MINIMALISM info"
System limits
The function is not available if one of the fol‐
lowing conditions applies:
▷ DSC OFF and TRACTION are activated.
▷ Cruise control is activated.
▷ If driving in the dynamic limit range.
▷ If driving on steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ The battery charge state is temporarily too
low.
▷ The vehicle electrical system is drawing ex‐
cessive current.
MINIMALISM analyzer
Concept
The function helps develop an especially effi‐
cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
This display will help you adjust your driving
style and save some fuel.
The last 15 minutes of a trip are evaluated.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by
adopting an efficient driving style. This gain in
range is displayed as a bonus range in the in‐
strument cluster and on the Control Display.
Functional requirement
This function is available in GREEN Mode.
Calling up MINIMALISM Analyser
Via MINI Driving Modes switch
1. Activating GREEN Mode.
2. "MINIMALISM"
3. Select the symbol.
Display on the Control Display
The display of the MINIMALISM analyzer con‐
sists of a fish in a water glass riding along on
the roof of a MINI and a table of values.
The fish and the movements of the water in the
bowl, arrow 1, symbolize the efficiency of the
driving style.
The more efficient the driving style, the less the
water sloshes around in the bowl and the bet‐
ter is the fish's mood. If the driving style is inef‐
ficient, the water oscillates, the fish's mood
worsens, and a reduced number of stars is dis‐
played.
The table of values, arrow 2, contains stars and
evaluates the driving style in different catego‐
ries. The more efficient the driving style, the
more stars are displayed in the table.
The bonus range, arrow 3, achieved by a driv‐
ing style that minimizes fuel consumption is
Seite 194
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
displayed below the table of values. The more
efficient the driving style, the faster the bonus
range increases.
To assist with an efficient driving style, GREEN
tips are displayed while driving.
Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Saving
fuel, refer to page 189.
Seite 195
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
MOVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Refueling
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 200, prior to refueling.
Safety information
NOTE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured
anymore. There is a risk of damage to property.
Refuel promptly.◀
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge
and open it.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Seite 198
MOBILITY
Refueling
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Closing
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed during closing. The cap
cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors
can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Pay attention that the re‐
taining strap is not jammed or crushed when
closing the cap.◀
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Follow the following
when refueling
General information
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com‐
pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel
pump nozzle during refueling causes:
▷ Premature switching off.
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐
tion.
Safety information
NOTE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling
of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system.
Painted surfaces may be damaged by contact
with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the environ‐
ment. There is a risk of damage to property.
Avoid overfilling.◀
Seite 199
Refueling
MOBILITY
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Fuel
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in
winter, for instance helps make a cold start eas‐
ier.
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refuel‐
ing.
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐
dards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Safety information
NOTE
Do not press the Start/Stop button after
refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the
catalytic converter is permanently damaged.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
refuel or add the following in the case of gaso‐
line engines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese
or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.◀
NOTE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and the engine. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not use fuels with a higher per‐
centage of ethanol than recommended. Do not
refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5
to M100.◀
NOTE
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not fill with fuel that
does not comply with the minimum quality.◀
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
ally, problems relating to drivability, starting
and stalling, especially under certain environ‐
mental conditions such as high ambient tem‐
perature and high altitude, may occur.
Seite 200
MOBILITY
Fuel
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐
chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
nance.◀
Recommended fuel grade
MINI recommends AKI 91.
John Cooper Works:
MINI recommends AKI 93.
Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the rated
performance and consumption values.
Minimum fuel grade
MINI recommends AKI 89.
John Cooper Works:
MINI recommends AKI 91.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high external temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Seite 201
Fuel
MOBILITY
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Tire inflation pressure
General information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
▷ Fuel consumption.
Safety information
WARNING
A tire with too little or no tire inflation
pressure may heat up significantly and sustain
damage. This will have a negative impact on
aspects of handling, such as steering and brak‐
ing response. There is a risk of an accident.
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and
correct it as needed, for instance twice a month
and before a long trip.◀
Tire inflation pressure specifications
In the tire inflation pressure table
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 204, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
General information
Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation
pressure increases with the tire temperature.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Checking using tire inflation pressure
specifications in the tire inflation
pressure table
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold
tires or tires at the same temperature as the
ambient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels
when the tires are cold, i.e.:
▷ Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has
not been exceeded.
Seite 202
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at
least 2 hours after a trip.
1. Determine, refer to page 202, the intended
tire inflation pressure levels for the
mounted tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur‐
rent tire inflation pressure value deviates
from the specified value.
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed
onto the tire valves.
After correcting the tire inflation
pressure
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Checking the tire inflation pressure of
the emergency wheel
Located behind the bumper on the underside
of the vehicle is an opening for checking the
tire inflation pressure.
Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/
160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 204, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also be found on the
tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Seite 203
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
On 3-door models: COOPER
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
175/60 R 16 86 H
M+S XL RSC
175/65 R 15 84 H
M+S A/S Std
175/65 R 15 88 H
M+S XL Std
175/65 R 15 88
rear XL Std
185/50 R 17 86 H
M+S XL RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H
M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87
V M+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W
RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V
M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W
XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W
XL RSC
2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
Emergency wheel
T 115/70 R 15 90
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
On 3-door models: COOPER S
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
195/55 R 16 87 H
M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M
+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W
RSC
2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
175/60 R 16 86 H
M+S XL RSC
185/50 R 17 86 H
M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W
XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W
XL RSC
2.6 / 38 2.4 / 35
Seite 204
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER
WORKS
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
185/50 R 17 86 H
M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W
XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V
M+S XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W
XL RSC
2.9 / 42 2.7 / 39
On 5-door models: COOPER
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
175/65 R 15 84 H
M+S A/S Std
175/65 R 15 88 H
M+S XL Std
175/65 R 15 88
rear XL Std
195/55 R 16 87 H
M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87
V M+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W
RSC
2.5 / 36 2.3 / 33
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
205/45 R 17 88 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V
M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W
XL RSC
2.5 / 36 2.4 / 35
175/60 R 16 86 H
M+S XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W
XL RSC
185/50 R 17 86 H
M+S XL RSC
2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38
Emergency wheel
T 115/70 R 15 90
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Seite 205
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
On 5-door models: COOPER S
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
195/55 R 16 87 H
M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M
+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W
RSC
2.5 / 36 2.3 / 33
175/60 R 16 86 H
M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W
XL RSC
185/50 R 17 86 H
M+S XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W
XL RSC
2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39
Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds
above 100 mph/160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for op‐
timum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 206, and adjust as necessary.
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
On 3-door models: COOPER
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
175/65 R 15 84 H
M+S A/S Std
175/65 R 15 88 H
M+S XL Std
175/65 R 15 88
rear XL Std
175/60 R 16 86 H
M+S XL RSC
185/50 R 17 86 H
M+S XL RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H
M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87
V M+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W
RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V
M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W
XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W
XL RSC
2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38
Emergency wheel
T 115/70 R 15 90
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Seite 206
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
On 3-door models: COOPER S
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
195/55 R 16 87 H
M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M
+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W
RSC
2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38
175/60 R 16 86 H
M+S XL RSC
185/50 R 17 86 H
M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W
XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W
XL RSC
3.1 / 45 2.9 / 42
On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER
WORKS
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
185/50 R 17 86 H
M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W
XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V
M+S XL RSC
3.1 / 45 2.9 / 42
205/40 R 18 86 W
XL RSC
3.4 / 49 3.2 / 46
Seite 207
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
On 5-door models: COOPER
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
175/65 R 15 84 H
M+S A/S Std
175/65 R 15 88 H
M+S XL Std
175/65 R 15 88
rear XL Std
195/55 R 16 87 H
M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87
V M+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W
RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V
M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W
XL RSC
2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38
175/60 R 16 86 H
M+S XL RSC
185/50 R 17 86 H
M+S XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W
XL RSC
2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41
Emergency wheel
T 115/70 R 15 90
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
On 5-door models: COOPER S
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
195/55 R 16 87 H
M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M
+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W
RSC
2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41
175/60 R 16 86 H
M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W
XL RSC
185/50 R 17 86 H
M+S XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W
XL RSC
3.1 / 45 3.1 / 45
Tire identification marks
Tire size
205/45 R 17 84 V
205: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
17: rim diameter in inches
84: load rating, not for ZR tires
V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Seite 208
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire side‐
wall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR –
on the certification label on the driver’s door
pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be
greater than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross
Axle Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear
GAWR and tire loads, respectively.
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
R = 106 mph/170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3817
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
3817: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
Recommendation
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
Manufacture date
You can find the manufacture date of the tire
on the tire's sidewall.
Designation Manufacture date
DOT … 3817 38th week, 2017
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature
A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and cli‐
mate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under control‐
led conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hy‐
droplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Seite 209
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger ve‐
hicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 213, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased
risk of hydroplaning.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for
winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
circumference and have the legally required
minimum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm.
The positions of the wear indicators are marked
on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indi‐
cator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-
profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations.
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
Seite 210
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
▷ Driving over curbs.
▷ Road damage.
▷ Tire inflation pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading.
▷ Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres‐
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control.
There is a risk of an accident. If tire damage is
suspected while driving, immediately reduce
speed and stop. Have wheels and tires
checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to the
nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. Have
vehicle towed or transported as needed. Do not
repair damaged tires, but have them re‐
placed.◀
WARNING
Tires can become damaged by driving
over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at
high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire
cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-section,
the higher the risk of tire damage. There is a
danger of accidents and property damage. If
possible, drive around obstacles, or drive over
them slowly and carefully.◀
Changing wheels and
tires
Mounting and wheel balancing
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
General information
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
cle, for instance due to contact with the body
due to tolerances despite the same official size
rating. There is a risk of an accident. The manu‐
facturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that
you use wheels and tires that have been rec‐
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer for
your vehicle type.◀
WARNING
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will
have a negative impact on the vehicle's han‐
dling and on the function of a variety of sys‐
tems, such as ABS or DSC. There is a risk of an
accident. To maintain good handling and vehi‐
cle response, use only tires with a single tread
configuration from a single manufacturer. The
manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that
you use wheels and tires that have been rec‐
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer for
your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have
the original wheel/tire combination remounted
on the vehicle as soon as possible.◀
Seite 211
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐
cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire
brands can be identified by a star on the tire
sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different tire
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
ice life can be limited. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide
better winter traction than summer tires, they
usually do not provide the same level of per‐
formance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then attach a label showing the permissible
maximum speed in the field of view. The label
is available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not
exceed the permissible maximum speed.
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
case of a flat tire. Further information is availa‐
ble from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
and rear axles depending on individual driving
conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs be‐
tween the axles to achieve even wear. Further
information is available from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure
and correct, if needed.
Storing tires
Air pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
place.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease, and solvents.
Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Seite 212
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Run-flat tires
Concept
Run-flat tires permit continued driving under
restricted conditions even in the event of a
complete loss of tire inflation pressure.
General information
The wheels are composed of tires that are self-
supporting to a limited degree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
main drivable to a restricted degree in the
event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driving
with a flat tire.
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Label
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with
RSC Run-flat System Component.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed temporarily to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
General information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire. Only remove
foreign objects if they are visibly protruding
from the tire.
Seite 213
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
TPM wheel electronics replaced at the next
opportunity.
▷ The compressor can be used to check the
tire inflation pressure.
Overview
Storage
The Mobility System is located under the cargo
floor panel.
Sealant container
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Compressor
1 Sealant container unlocking
2 Holder for sealant container
3 Inflation pressure dial
4 Reduce inflation pressure
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Filling the tire with sealant
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain pollutants which are colorless and odorless.
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accu‐
mulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger
to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure
sufficient ventilation.◀
NOTE
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 minutes.◀
Seite 214
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Filling
1. Shake the sealant container.
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover
of the sealant container. Do not kink the
hose.
3. Slide the sealant container into the holder
on the compressor housing, ensuring that it
engages audibly.
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking
wheel.
5. With the compressor switched off, insert
the plug into the power socket inside the
vehicle.
6. With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to
fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire infla‐
tion pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor
at this point.
Seite 215
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Checking and adjusting the tire
inflation pressure
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of
at least 2 bar must be reached.
Removing and stowing the sealant
container
1.
Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the tire valve.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
3. Remove the sealant container from the
compressor.
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in
suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo
area.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not
reached
1.
Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
3. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
4. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
5. With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar
cannot be reached, contact your dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is
reached, see Minimum tire inflation pres‐
sure is reached.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
7. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
reached
1.
Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
2. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to
ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed
in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Seite 216
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Adjustment
1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
3. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least
2.0 bar.
▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with the
ignition switched on or the engine run‐
ning, switch on the compressor.
▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the
button on the compressor.
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
6. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed
of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the run-flat tires, refer to page 123.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer
to page 118.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System at the next op‐
portunity.
Snow chains
Safety information
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on un‐
suitable tires, the snow chains can come into
contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of damage to property. Only
mount snow chains on tires that are designated
by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of
snow chains.◀
WARNING
Insufficiently tight snow chains may dam‐
age tires and vehicle components. There is a
risk of accidents or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐
ficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according
to the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.◀
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 175/65 R 15.
▷ 175/60 R 16.
Seite 217
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ 185/50 R 17.
John Cooper Works:
185/50 R 17.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Do not initialize the run-flat tires after mount‐
ing snow chains, as doing so may result in in‐
correct readings.
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM af‐
ter mounting snow chains, as doing so may re‐
sult in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if needed.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a
wheel does not always need to be changed im‐
mediately when there is a loss of tire inflation
pressure due to a flat tire.
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
DANGER
The vehicle jack is only provided for
short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
changes. Even if all safety measures are ob‐
served, there is a risk of the raised vehicle fall‐
ing, if the vehicle jack tilts over. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is
raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not
start the engine.◀
DANGER
Supports such as wooden blocks under
the vehicle jack may prevent it from achieving
its load capacity due to its restricted height. The
load capacity of the wooden blocks may be ex‐
ceeded, causing the vehicle to tip over. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place
supports under the vehicle jack.◀
WARNING
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac‐
turer, is provided in order to perform a wheel
change in the event of a breakdown. The jack is
not designed for frequent use; for example,
changing from summer to winter tires. Using
the jack frequently may cause it to become
jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. Only use the
jack to attach an emergency or spare wheel in
the event of a breakdown.◀
WARNING
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for
example snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack
can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possi‐
ble, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-
resistant surface.◀
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on the ve‐
hicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift
any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
jack.◀
WARNING
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐
hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may
slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. When
cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is in‐
serted in the jacking point next to the wheel
housing.◀
Seite 218
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
WARNING
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack
may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are ex‐
erted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. While the vehicle is raised,
do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull
abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel re‐
moved by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Securing the vehicle against rolling
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐
tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away
when changing a wheel.
On a level surface
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in
front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to
the wheel to be changed.
On a slight downhill gradient
If you need to change a wheel on a slight
downhill grade, place chocks and other suitable
objects, for instance a rock, under the wheels
of both the front and rear axles against the roll‐
ing direction.
Lug bolt lock
Concept
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
which matches the coding.
Overview
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is located in the
onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 233.
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1.
Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the
lug bolt.
Screwing on
1.
Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces‐
sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug
bolt.
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening tor‐
que is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after
screwing on the lug bolt.
Seite 219
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
ground at a safe distance from traffic.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ Depending on the equipment version, get
tools and the emergency wheel from the
vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning light at an appro‐
priate distance.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll‐
ing.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the marked positions.
Jacking up the vehicle
WARNING
Hands and fingers can be jammed when
using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with the described hand position and
do not change this position while using the ve‐
hicle jack.◀
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar‐
row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank or
lever with your other hand, arrow 2.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point closest to the
wheel to be changed.
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehi‐
cle jack crank or lever clockwise.
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack
as soon as the vehicle jack is under load
and continue turning the vehicle jack crank
or lever with one hand.
Seite 220
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and at a right angle beneath the
jacking point.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle
jack.
7. Crank up the vehicle jack until the entire
surface of the jack is in contact with the
ground and the wheel in question is raised
a maximum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off the
ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
1.
Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a
crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the ve‐
hicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐
companying lug bolts may have to be used
as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐
tern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclock‐
wise to retract the vehicle jack and lower
the vehicle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se‐
curely.
After the wheel change
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
area, if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of its
size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the run-flat tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the
nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Emergency wheel
Concept
In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel
can be used in place of the wheel with the de‐
fective tire. The emergency wheel is only in‐
tended for temporary use until the defective
tire/wheel has been replaced.
General information
Mount one emergency wheel only.
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the
emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly,
and correct it as needed.
Seite 221
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Safety information
WARNING
The emergency wheel has particular di‐
mensions. When driving with an emergency
wheel, changed driving properties may occur,
for instance reduced lane stability when brak‐
ing, longer braking distance, and changed self-
steering properties in the limit area. There is a
risk of an accident. Drive moderately and do
not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Overview
The emergency wheel is housed in a well on
the underbody of the vehicle. The screw con‐
nection of the emergency wheel is under the
cargo floor panel, on the floor of the storage
compartment for the onboard vehicle tool kit.
The wheel change tools are under the cargo
floor panel.
Removing the emergency wheel
1.
Loosen the nut using the wheel wrench
from the onboard vehicle tool kit.
2. Remove the retaining plate.
3. Screw wheel lug wrench onto the thread
and hold in place with one hand.
4. Unlock the locking hexagon of the emer‐
gency wheel well using the hexagon at‐
tached to retaining plate.
5. Lower the emergency wheel with the wheel
wrench.
6. Unscrewing the wheel wrench
7. Pull out the well with emergency wheel un‐
der the vehicle toward the rear.
8. Remove the spacer and emergency wheel
from the well.
9. Stow the well and spacer in the vehicle.
Replacing the tires
1.
Have the damaged tire replaced.
2. Replace the emergency wheel with the new
wheel.
Installing the emergency wheel
Have the emergency wheel installed back into
the vehicle by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 222
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Filler neck for washer fluid
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Oil filler neck
4 Jump-starting, positive terminal
5 Jump-starting, negative terminal
6 Coolant reservoir
Hood
Safety information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage vehicle components
and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of
personal and property damage. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that, in the
effort to avoid such risks, work in the engine
compartment be performed by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.◀
Seite 223
Engine compartment
MOBILITY
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
WARNING
The engine compartment accommodates
moving components. Certain components in
the engine compartment can also move with
the vehicle switched off, for instance the radia‐
tor fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach
into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of
clothing and hair away from moving parts.◀
WARNING
There are protruding parts, for instance
locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There
is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay atten‐
tion to protruding parts and keep clear of these
areas.◀
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of an accident. Stop immediately and cor‐
rectly close the hood.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when opening
and closing the hood. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
NOTE
When the hood is closed, it must engage
on both sides. Pressing again can damage the
hood. There is a risk of damage to property.
Open the hood again and then close it energet‐
ically. Avoid pressing again.◀
Opening the hood
1.
Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
Indicator/warning lights
When the hood is opened, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Closing the hood
Let the hood fall from approx. 16 inches/40 cm,
arrow.
The hood must engage on both sides.
Seite 224
MOBILITY
Engine compartment
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Engine oil
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
your driving style and driving conditions.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling by taking a detailed measure‐
ment.
The engine oil consumption can increase in the
following situations, for example:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐
fied as not suitable.
Different Check Control messages appear, de‐
pending on the engine oil level.
Safety information
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.◀
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not add too much en‐
gine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.◀
Electronic oil measure‐
ment
General information
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles:
▷ Monitoring.
▷ Detailed measurement.
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, for instance
when taking curves aggressively, regularly per‐
form a detailed measurement.
Monitoring
Concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and can be shown on the Control
Display.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving.
Seite 225
Engine oil
MOBILITY
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Displaying the engine oil level
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
System limits
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, it may not be
possible to calculate a measured value. In this
case, the measured value for the last, suffi‐
ciently long trip is displayed.
Detailed measurement
Concept
The engine oil level is checked when the vehi‐
cle is stationary and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
General information
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
Functional requirements
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral
position, clutch and accelerator pedals not
depressed.
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in se‐
lector lever position N or P and accelerator
pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
perature.
Performing a detailed measurement
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Measure engine oil level"
4. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Adding engine oil
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to
page 227.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off the igni‐
tion before adding engine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating materials, for instance oils,
greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful in‐
gredients. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. Follow the instructions on the containers.
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.◀
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.◀
Seite 226
MOBILITY
Engine oil
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not add too much en‐
gine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.◀
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 223.
Adding engine oil
1.
Open the hood, refer to page 223.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise.
3. Add engine oil.
4. Close the cap.
Engine oil types to add
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Safety information
NOTE
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
use oil additives.◀
NOTE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk
of damage to property. When selecting an en‐
gine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the
correct oil rating.◀
Suitable engine oil types
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rat‐
ing standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
API SL, API SM, or API SN.
Viscosity grades
Gasoline engine:
When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
the engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE
0W-30 or SAE 0W-20. The suitable viscosity
grade is indicated on a label in the engine com‐
partment.
Viscosity class SAE 0W-20 is only suitable for
particular engines.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
Seite 227
Engine oil
MOBILITY
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Engine oil change
NOTE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not exceed the service data in‐
dicated in the vehicle.◀
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
the engine oil.
Seite 228
MOBILITY
Engine oil
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Coolant
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the
cooling system with the engine cooled down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of
injury and risk of damage to property. Do not
allow additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi‐
tives only.◀
Coolant level
Overview
The coolant reservoir is in the engine compart‐
ment, refer to page 223.
Open the hood, refer to page 223.
Checking
There are yellow Min and Max marks in the
coolant reservoir.
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
4. The coolant level is correct if it lies between
the minimum and maximum marks in the
filler neck.
Seite 229
Coolant
MOBILITY
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Close the cap.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 230
MOBILITY
Coolant
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Maintenance
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
MINI maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals may vary
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants, and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS
uses these to calculate the need for mainte‐
nance.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
General information
Information on service requirements, refer to
page 97, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. The
dealer’s service center can read this data out
and suggest an optimized maintenance scope
for the vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for
US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Book‐
let for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require‐
ments.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
Seite 231
Maintenance
MOBILITY
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
tained.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Safety information
NOTE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an
intricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions system.
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the socket
for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop or other persons that have
the specialized training and equipment for pur‐
poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐
board Diagnosis.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐
ous engine misfiring within a brief period
can seriously damage emission control
components, in particular the catalytic con‐
verter.
Seite 232
MOBILITY
Maintenance
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Replacing components
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the on‐
board vehicle tool kit is located on the right
side under the cargo floor panel or in a bag on
the right side of the cargo area.
After use, secure the bag with the onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.
Wiper blade replacement
Safety information
NOTE
The window may sustain damage if the
wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade in‐
stalled. There is a risk of damage to property.
Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper
blade. Do not fold or switch on the wiper with‐
out a wiper blade installed.◀
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Front wiper blades
1.
To change the wiper blades, fold up the
wiper arms.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Open the wiper blade lock, arrow.
4. Pull the wiper blade down out of the holder
on the wiper arm, arrow 1.
5. Pull the wiper blade free from the holder of
the wiper arm, arrow 2.
Seite 233
Replacing components
MOBILITY
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
6. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in re‐
verse order.
7. Fold down the wiper arm.
Rear wiper blade
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back.
3. Push the wiper blade out of the fastening
by continuing to turn it all the way.
4. Insert the new wiper blade by following the
steps in reverse order. The wiper blade
must engage audibly.
5. Fold down the wiper arm.
Light/bulb replacement
General information
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you have appropriate work performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop if you are unfami‐
liar with it or if it has not been described here.
A spare light box is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 234.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐
odes installed behind a cover as a light source.
These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐
ventional lasers and are officially designated as
Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 234.
Safety information
Lights and bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a
risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they have
cooled off.◀
WARNING
Work on switched-on lighting systems
can cause short circuits. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. When working
on the lighting system, switch off the lights in
question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
turer's instructions.◀
NOTE
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a
clean cloth or something similar, or hold the
bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
WARNING
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. Do not look directly into the headlights
or other light sources. Do not remove the LED
covers.◀
Seite 234
MOBILITY
Replacing components
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
light glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights switched
on, increasing humidity forms, for instance wa‐
ter droplets in the light, have the headlights
checked.
Headlight setting
The headlight adjustments can be affected by
changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight
adjustment was changed, have it checked and,
if necessary, corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Front halogen lights, bulb replacement
Overview
Halogen headlights
1 Low beams/high beams
2 Turn signal
Bug light
1 Parking lights
2 Daytime running lights
3 Fog lights
Low beams/high beams
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 234.
Bulbs: H4
1.
Open the hood, refer to page 224.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow, and
remove.
3. Pull off the connector.
4. Unclip spring clip, arrow, and fold down.
Seite 235
Replacing components
MOBILITY
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
5. Remove the bulb from the headlight hous‐
ing.
6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in
the reverse order.
Turn signal
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 234.
Bulbs: PW24W
With white turn signal lights: PWY24W
1. Turn the steering wheel.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 1, and
remove.
3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclockwise,
and remove it.
4. Pull bulb holder out of the bulb housing; if
needed, loosen it with small tilting move‐
ments if possible.
5. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in
the reverse order.
Parking lights/fog lights/daytime
running lights
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 234.
Bulbs:
▷ Parking lights for halogen headlights: W5W
Parking lights for LED headlights:
W5W NBV.
▷ Daytime running light: PSX24W.
▷ Fog light: H8.
Replacing the bulbs
1.
Turn the steering wheel.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 2, and
remove.
3. Pull off the connector.
4. Remove the bulb holder.
Seite 236
MOBILITY
Replacing components
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ Parking lights: turn the bulb holder, ar‐
row 1, counterclockwise and remove.
▷ Daytime running lights: squeeze the
upper and lower locks of the bulb
holder, arrow 2, and remove the bulb
holder.
For better accessibility, remove the bulb
of the fog light as needed.
▷ Fog lights: turn the bulb holder, ar‐
row 3, counterclockwise and remove.
5. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in
the reverse order.
The daytime running lights bulb holder en‐
gages audibly, first below, then above.
LED front lights, bulb replacement
General information
The following lights feature LED technology:
▷ Daytime running lights
▷ High beams
▷ Low beams
▷ Parking lights
▷ Fog lights
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Overview
Position of the headlights
1 Daytime running lights
2 Low beams/high beams
3 Turn signal
LED bug light
1 Parking lights
2 Fog lights
Turn signal
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 234.
Bulbs: PW24W
Seite 237
Replacing components
MOBILITY
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
With white turn signal lights: PWY24W
1. Turn the steering wheel.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 1, and
remove.
3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclockwise,
and remove it.
4. Pull bulb holder out of the bulb housing; if
needed, loosen it with small tilting move‐
ments if possible.
5. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in
the reverse order.
Tail lights, bulb replacement
Overview
Vehicles with a rear fog light
1 Side tail lights
2 Rear fog light
3 License plate light
4 Center brake light
Vehicle with two rear fog lights
1 Side tail lights
2 Rear fog lights
3 License plate light
4 Center brake light
Seite 238
MOBILITY
Replacing components
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Side tail lights
1 Brake lights/tail lights
2 Turn signal
3 Reversing lights
Side LED tail lights
1 Tail lights
2 Turn signal
3 Brake light
4 Reversing lights
Side tail lights
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 234.
Bulbs: P21W
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove left or right cover.
3. Through the opening, loosen the plug con‐
nector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder.
Press the latches together, arrows 1, and
remove the bulb holder.
4. Remove the bulb holder from the opening.
5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
▷ Arrow 1: brake lights/tail lights.
▷ Arrow 2: turn signal.
Seite 239
Replacing components
MOBILITY
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
▷ Arrow 3: reversing light.
6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make
sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐
teners.
Central brake light and license plate
lights
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 234.
The lights feature LED technology. In the case
of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Vehicles with a rear fog light
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 234.
Bulbs: W16W
1.
On vehicles with heat shield:
Loosen 3 screws, arrow.
2. Push the heat shield forward and the
bumper back in order to be able to reach
the fog light.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
remove.
The wire is long enough to guide the socket
down and through between any heat shield
that may be installed and the bumper.
4. Replace nonworking bulb.
5. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse
order of removal.
Vehicle with two rear fog lights
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 234.
Bulbs: W16W
Left rear fog light:
1.
On vehicles with heat shield:
Loosen 3 screws, arrow.
2. Push the heat shield forward and the
bumper back in order to be able to reach
the fog light.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
remove.
Seite 240
MOBILITY
Replacing components
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
The wire is long enough to guide the socket
down and through between any heat shield
that may be installed and the bumper.
4. Replace nonworking bulb.
5. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse
order of removal.
Right fog light:
1.
Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
remove.
The wire is long enough to guide the socket
down and through between any heat shield
that may be installed and the bumper.
2. Replace nonworking bulb.
3. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse
order of removal.
Side turn signal, bulb replacement
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 234.
Bulbs:
▷ With orange lens: W5W.
▷ With white lens: WY5W.
1. Open the hood. The covers of the side turn
signal lights are on the left and right next to
the hinges of the hood.
2. Loosen nuts of the cover by hand and re‐
move the cover.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
remove.
4. Replace the bulb.
5. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse
order of removal. Insert the nuts of the
cover and press down.
Seite 241
Replacing components
MOBILITY
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Replacing the vehicle battery
General information
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you have a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after
the battery has been replaced. Once the bat‐
tery has been registered again, all comfort fea‐
tures will be available without restriction and
any Check Control messages displayed which
relate to comfort features will disappear.
Safety information
NOTE
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle
functions. There is a risk of personal and prop‐
erty damage. Only vehicle batteries that are
compatible with your vehicle type should be in‐
stalled in your vehicle. Information on compati‐
ble vehicle batteries is available at your dealer’s
service center.◀
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently
charged to guarantee that the battery remains
usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by a
red indicator light.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
▷ Steptronic transmission: when parked for
long periods of time in selector lever posi‐
tion D, R or N.
Safety information
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is a
risk of damage to property. Only connect bat‐
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 245, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to
be newly initialized or individual settings up‐
dated, for example:
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop or
take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Seite 242
MOBILITY
Replacing components
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Fuses
Safety information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a risk
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse.
Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐
stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀
Accessing the fuses
The fuses are located in the passenger floor
area under the dashboard.
1.
To open, loosen screws, arrow 1.
2. Fold down the fuse holder, arrow 2.
Proceed in the reverse order to install.
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop replace
the fuses.
Seite 243
Replacing components
MOBILITY
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Hazard warning flash‐
ers
The button is located above the Control Dis‐
play.
The red light in the button flashes when the
hazard warning flashers are activated.
Roadside Assistance
General information
Roadside Assistance can be reached around the
clock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐
tance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance phone number can be
viewed on the Central Information Display (CID)
or a connection to Roadside Assistance can be
established directly.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located in the tailgate.
To remove, loosen the brackets.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐
ularly and replace any expired items promptly.
Storage
The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
Seite 244
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a
risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order
during connection.◀
NOTE
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that no body contact oc‐
curs.◀
Preparation
1.
Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals
The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐
partment acts as the battery's positive terminal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
1.
Pull off the lid of the starting aid terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1.
Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
Seite 245
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another
attempt in order to allow the discharged
battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Tow-starting and towing
Safety information
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Steptronic transmission with driven
front axle: transporting the vehicle
General information
The vehicle must not be towed if the front
wheels are touching the ground.
Safety information
NOTE
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is a
risk of damage to property. Have vehicle trans‐
ported only with lifted front axle or on a load‐
ing platform.◀
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
danger area, it can be pushed for a short dis‐
tance.
Roll or push, refer to page 86, the vehicle.
Tow truck
Your vehicle should be transported with a tow
truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
NOTE
The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.◀
Manual transmission
Towing or pushing the vehicle
A broken-down vehicle can be towed or
pushed.
Roll or push, refer to page 83, the vehicle.
NOTE
If manual unlocking of the parking brake
is not possible, the vehicle cannot be moved or
towed. There is a risk of damage to property.
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.◀
Follow the following instructions:
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn
signals, and wipers may be unavailable.
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
Seite 246
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
needs to be applied when braking and
steering.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter than
the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse.
▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of
30 mph/50 km/h.
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of
30 miles/50 km.
Tow truck
With driven front axle
Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
NOTE
The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.◀
Towing other vehicles
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
ing on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden‐
tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or
a warning triangle in the rear window.
Safety information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is a risk of an accident! Make
sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing
vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be
towed.◀
NOTE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc‐
cur. There is a risk of damage to property. Cor‐
rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting.◀
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the
following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the
vehicle to be towed without jerking.
Seite 247
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,
refer to page 233, are together in the cargo
area.
Use of the tow fitting:
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for
instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow
fitting.
Safety information
NOTE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there may be damage to the vehicle or to the
tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Follow the notes on using the tow fitting.◀
Screw thread for tow fitting
Threaded holes for the tow fitting are located in
the front and rear of the vehicle on the right
side with respect to the direction of travel.
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the Steptronic transmission.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties
corrected by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 244. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐
alytic converter, only tow-start while the engine
is cold.
1.
Switch on the hazard warning system and
comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 69.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release the
pedal. After the engine starts, immediately
press on the clutch pedal again.
Seite 248
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope, and switch off the hazard
warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Seite 249
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Care
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Washing the vehicle
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves
in the area below the windshield when the
hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle.
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
Safety information
NOTE
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high. There
is a risk of damage to property. Maintain suffi‐
cient distance and do not spray too long con‐
tinuously. Follow the operating instructions for
the high-pressure washer.◀
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTE
Water can penetrate in the windshield
area due to high-pressure washers. There is a
risk of damage to property. Avoid high-pres‐
sure washers.◀
NOTE
Improper use of automatic vehicle
washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There
is a risk of damage to property. Follow the fol‐
lowing instructions:
▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
the chassis.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
▷ Unscrew the rod antenna to avoid the rod
antenna breaking off.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain
sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
tem.◀
Driving into a vehicle wash with a
manual transmission
In vehicle washes, the vehicle must be able to
roll freely.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 83.
Seite 250
MOBILITY
Care
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Driving into a vehicle wash with a
Steptronic transmission
In vehicle washes, the vehicle must be able to
roll freely.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 86.
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
the outside when in selector lever position N. A
signal is sounded when an attempt is made to
lock the vehicle.
Driving out of a vehicle wash
Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.
Start the engine, refer to page 70.
Headlights
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced. The heat generated during
braking dries brake discs and brake pads and
protects them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper
blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
General information
MINI recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care
products are available from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that are
dangerous and harmful to your health. There is
a risk of injury. When cleaning the interior,
open the doors or windows. Only use products
intended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐
structions on the container.◀
Vehicle paint
General information
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your vehicle care to these
influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Matte finish
Only use cleaning and care products suitable
for vehicles with matte finish.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Seite 251
Care
MOBILITY
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Upholstery material care
General information
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vac‐
uum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bev‐
erage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber
cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
terial vigorously.
Safety information
NOTE
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is a
risk of damage to property. Ensure that any
Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disc.
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use
only water and suitable cleaning agents for
cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
or noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Plastic components
NOTE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents,
such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease re‐
movers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts.
There is a risk of damage to property. Clean
with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly
with water.◀
Plastic components are e.g.:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Light lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the car's interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Seite 252
MOBILITY
Care
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Safety belts
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety
belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the
safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger
to life. Use only a mild soapy solution for clean‐
ing the safety belts.◀
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if
they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐
not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can
be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐
rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Trailer hitch with removable ball
Keep the ball head and receptacle clean.
Regularly grease or oil bearings, sliding surfaces
and the small balls on the holding pin with
resin-free greases or oils.
Before using steam cleaners or high pressure
cleaners on the vehicle, remove the ball head
and attach the cover to the receptacle.
Do not clean the ball head with a steam cleaner
or high pressure cleaner.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐
gent.
Displays/Screens/Projection lenses
NOTE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of displays
and screens. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
cloth.◀
NOTE
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Avoid pressure that is too high
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
For stubborn soiling on the projection lens of
the Head-up Display, dampen the microfiber
cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, refer to
page 105.
Long-term vehicle storage
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be taken.
Further information is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Seite 253
Care
MOBILITY
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
FIND ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Technical data
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
for instance due to the selected special equip‐
ment, country version or country-specific
measurement method. Detailed values can be
found in the approval documents, on labels on
the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ways has priority over the information in this
Owner's Manual.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for instance a roof antenna,
roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,
for instance due to the selected special equip‐
ment, tires, load and chassis version.
MINI 3-door
Width with mirrors inches/mm 76.1/1,932
Width without mirrors inches/mm 68/1,727
Height inches/mm 55.7/1,414
Length inches/mm 151.1-152.5/3,837-3,874
Wheelbase inches/mm 98.2/2,495
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 35.5/10.8
Seite 256
REFERENCE
Technical data
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
MINI 5-door
Width with mirrors inches/mm 76.1/1,932
Width without mirrors inches/mm 68/1,727
Height inches/mm 56.1/1,425
Length inches/mm 157.4-158/3,998-4,013
Wheelbase inches/mm 101.1/2,567
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 36.1/11.0
Weights
MINI Cooper, 3-door
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,620/1,642
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,620/1,642
Load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 789/358
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 725/329
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,940/880
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,006/910
Approved rear axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,733/786
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 1,684/764
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 132/60
MINI Cooper, 5-door
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,814/1,730
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,814/1,730
Seite 257
Technical data
REFERENCE
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
MINI Cooper, 5-door
Load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 884/401
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 827/375
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,017/915
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,072/940
Approved rear axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,881/853
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 1,881/853
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
MINI Cooper S, 3-door
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,675/1,667
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,719/1,687
Load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 776/352
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 769/349
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,026/919
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,066/937
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,691/767
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 132/60
MINI Cooper S, 5-door
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,860/1,751
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,900/1,769
Load lbs/kg 884/401
Seite 258
REFERENCE
Technical data
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
MINI Cooper S, 5-door
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,086/946
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,125/964
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,881/853
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
MINI John Cooper Works, 3-door
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,719/1,687
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,765/1,708
Load lbs/kg 776/352
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,066/937
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,105/955
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,724/782
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 132/60
Capacities
MINI US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 11.6/44.0 Fuel quality, refer to
page 200.
Seite 259
Technical data
REFERENCE
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
Updates after the edito‐
rial deadline
These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual
contain updates made after the editorial dead‐
line:
▷ Information: vehicle identification number,
refer to page 12.
Seite 260
REFERENCE
Appendix
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Seite 261
Appendix
REFERENCE
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 134
Acceleration Assistant, see
Launch Control 89
Accessories and parts 8
ACC, see Camera-based cruise
control 139
Activated-charcoal filter 163
Activation times, parked-car
ventilation 164
Active Cruise Control, see
Camera-based cruise con‐
trol 139
Adaptive brake lights, see
Brake force display 132
Additives, oil 227
Adjustments, steering
wheel 63
After washing vehicle 251
Airbags 115
Airbags, indicator and warning
light 117
Air circulation, see Recircu‐
lated-air mode 158, 162
Air conditioner 157
Air conditioning 158, 161
Air, dehumidifying, see Air
conditioning 158, 161
Air distribution,
manual 159, 162
Air flow, air conditioner 158
Air flow, automatic climate
control 162
Air pressure, tires 202
Air vents, see Ventilation 163
Alarm system 49
Alarm triggering 49
Alarm, unintentional 50
Alertness assistant 132
All-season tires, see Winter
tires 212
Alternative oil types 227
Antifreeze, washer fluid 81
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 134
Anti-slip control, see DSC 134
Anti-theft protection, lug
bolts 219
App, MINI Motorer’s Guide 33
Approach control warning
with city light braking func‐
tion 126
Approved axle load 257
Apps, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
Arrival time 102
Ash tray 169
Assistance when driving
off 137
AUTO intensity 161
Automatic climate con‐
trol 160
Automatic Curb Monitor 62
Automatic deactivation, front-
seat passenger airbags 117
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 110
Automatic locking 48
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 83
Automatic vehicle wash 250
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 161
AUTO program, intensity 161
Auto Start/Stop function 71
Auto washing 250
AUX-IN port, position in vehi‐
cle 170
AUX-IN port, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Average fuel consump‐
tion 101
Average speed 101
Axle loads, weights 257
B
Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
bar support 56
Backrest, seats 55
Band-aids, see First-aid
kit 244
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 242
Battery, vehicle 242
Being towed, see Tow-starting
and towing 246
Belts, safety belts 57
Beverage holder, cup
holder 173
Blocking, power window 52
Bonus range, GREEN
Mode 191
Bottle holder, see Cup
holder 173
Brake assistant 134
Brake discs, break-in 184
Brake force display 132
Brake lights, brake force dis‐
play 132
Brake pads, break-in 184
Braking, information 186
Breakdown assistance 244
Breakdown assistance, Road‐
side Assistance 244
Break-in 184
Seite 262
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 104
Bug light 235
Bulb replacement 234
Bulb replacement,
front 235, 237
Bulb replacement, rear 238
Bulb replacement, side 241
Bulbs and lights 234
Button, Start/Stop 69
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐
ing 244
C
Calendar, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
California Proposition 65
Warning 8
Camera-based assistance sys‐
tems, see Intelligent
Safety 125
Camera-based cruise con‐
trol 139
Camera lenses, care 253
Camera, rearview cam‐
era 150
Can holder, see Cup
holder 173
Care, displays 253
Care, vehicle 251
Care, washing the vehicle 250
Cargo area 175
Cargo area, adapting size 179
Cargo area, enlarging 177
Cargo area lid 45
Cargo area, loading 176
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 177
Cargo cover 176
Cargo position, rear seat back‐
rest 177
Cargo, stowing and secur‐
ing 176
Cargo straps 176
Carpet, care 253
Catalytic converter, see Hot
exhaust gas system 185
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 231
CD, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
Center armrest 173
Center console 18
Central Information Display
(CID) 20
Central Information Display
(CID) operating concept 20
Central instrument cluster,
LED ring 105
Central locking system, un‐
locking, from inside 42
Central screen, see Control
Display 20
Changes, technical, see For
Your Own Safety 8
Changing parts 233
Changing wheels 218
Changing wheels/tires 211
Chassis number, see Vehicle
identification number 12
Check Control 92
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 225
Children, seating position 64
Children, transporting
safely 64
Child restraint system 64
Child restraint system
LATCH 66
Child restraint systems,
mounting 65
Child safety locks 68
Child seat, mounting 65
Child seats 64
Chrome parts, care 252
Cigarette lighter 169
Cleaning, displays 253
Climate control 157, 160
Clothes hooks 174
Coasting 193
Coasting with engine decou‐
pled, coasting 193
Coasting with idling en‐
gine 193
Combination switch, see Turn
signals 74
Combi switch, see Wiper sys‐
tem 75, 78
Comfort Access 43
Comfort entry 39
Compartments in the
doors 173
Compass 167
Compressor 213
Computer, see Onboard Com‐
puter 100
Condensation on win‐
dows 162
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 187
Condition Based Service
CBS 231
Configuring driving pro‐
gram 137
Confirmation signal 49
Contacts, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
Continued driving with a flat
tire 121, 125
Control Display 20
Control Display, settings 104
Controller 21
Control systems, driving stabil‐
ity 134
Convenient closing 39
Convenient opening 39
Coolant 229
Cooling, maximum 161
Cooling system 229
Cornering light 111
Corrosion on brake discs 186
Cosmetic mirror 169
Courtesy lights during unlock‐
ing 39
Seite 263
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Courtesy lights with the vehi‐
cle locked 39
Cruise control 144
Cruise control, active 139
Cruise control with distance
control, see Camera-based
cruise control 139
Cruise control without dis‐
tance control, see Cruise
control 144
Cruising range 97
Cup holder 173
Current fuel consumption 97
D
Damage, tires 210
Damping control, dy‐
namic 136
Data memory 9
Data, technical 256, 259
Date 104
Date display 97
Daytime running lights 111
DCC, see Cruise control 144
Defrosting, see Defrosting the
windows 159
Defrosting, see Windows, de‐
frosting 162
Defrosting the windows 159
Dehumidifying, air 158, 161
Deleting personal data 26
Deletion of personal data 26
Destination distance 102
Digital clock 96
Digital compass 167
Dimensions 256
Dimmable exterior mirrors 62
Dimmable interior mirror 63
Direction indicator, see Turn
signals 74
Display, electronic, instrument
cluster 92
Display, engine tempera‐
ture 102
Display, GREEN Mode 190
Display lighting, see Instru‐
ment lighting 113
Displays 91
Displays, care 253
Disposal, coolant 230
Disposal, vehicle battery 242
Distance control, see PDC 146
Distance to destination 102
Divided screen view, split
screen 25
Drive-off assistant 137
Drive-off assistant, see
DSC 134
Driver assistance, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 125
Driving Dynamics Control, see
MINI Driving Modes
switch 136
Driving Excitement,
SPORT 102
Driving instructions, break-
in 184
Driving mode, GREEN 190
Driving modes 136
Driving notes, general 185
Driving on racetracks 188
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 134
Driving style analysis 194
Driving tip, GREEN tip 192
Driving tips 185
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 134
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 135
DVD, Video, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 136
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 134
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 135
E
Electronic displays, instrument
cluster 92
Electronic oil measure‐
ment 225
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, see DSC 134
E-mail, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 199
Emergency service, see Road‐
side Assistance 244
Emergency unlocking, trans‐
mission lock 89
Emergency wheel, compact
wheel, see Emergency
wheel 221
Energy Control 97
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 71
Engine, automatic switch-
off 71
Engine compartment 223
Engine compartment, working
in 223
Engine coolant 229
Engine idling when driving,
coasting 193
Engine oil 225
Engine oil, adding 226
Engine oil additives 227
Engine oil change 228
Engine oil filler neck 226
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 227
Engine oil types, suitable 227
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 244
Engine start, see Starting the
engine 70
Engine stop 71
Engine temperature, dis‐
play 102
Seite 264
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Entering a destination, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Entering an address, naviga‐
tion, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication 6
Entering a vehicle wash 250
Equipment, interior 165
Error displays, see Check Con‐
trol 92
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, see DSC 134
Exchanging wheels/tires 211
Exhaust gas system 185
Exiting a vehicle wash 250
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 62
Exterior mirrors 61
Exterior mirrors, Automatic
Curb Monitor 62
Exterior mirrors, malfunc‐
tion 62
External start 244
External temperature dis‐
play 96
External temperature warn‐
ing 96
Eyes for securing cargo 176
F
Failure message, see Check
Control 92
False alarm, see Unintentional
alarm 50
Fan, see Air flow 158, 162
Fastening safety belts, see
Safety belts 57
Filler neck for engine oil 226
Finding charging stations, see
Charging stations and points
of interest, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Fine wood, care 252
First-aid kit 244
Flat tire, changing wheels 218
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 123
Flat tire, repairing 213
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 118
Flat tire, warning
light 120, 124
Flooding 185
Floor carpet, care 253
Floor mats, care 253
Fogged up windows 159
Fold-away position, wind‐
shield wipers 77, 80
Fold back rear seat back‐
rests 177
Foot brake 186
For Your Own Safety 8
Front airbags 115
Front fog lights 112
Front-seat passenger airbags,
automatic deactivation 117
Front-seat passenger airbags,
indicator light 118
Front seats 55
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 123
Fuel 200
Fuel cap 198
Fuel consumption, see Aver‐
age fuel consumption 101
Fuel filler flap 198
Fuel gauge 96
Fuel quality 200
Fuel recommendation 200
Fuel, tank capacity 259
Fuse 243
G
Garage door opener, see
Integrated Universal Remote
Control 165
Gasoline 200
Gear shift indicator 98
General driving notes 185
Glare shield 169
Glass sunroof, initialize the
system 54
Glass sunroof, see Panoramic
glass sunroof 52
Glove compartment 172
GPS, navigation, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
GREEN bonus range 191
GREEN Mode 190
GREEN Mode driving style
analysis 194
GREEN - program, driving dy‐
namics 136
GREEN tip, driving tip 192
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 257
Ground clearance 187
H
Halogen headlights 235
Handbrake, see Parking
brake 74
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 166
Hands-free kit, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Hazard warning flashers 244
Head airbag 115
Headlight control, auto‐
matic 110
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture 110
Headlight flasher 75
Headlight glass 235
Headlights, care 251
Head restraints, front 59
Head restraints, rear 60
Head-up Display 105
Seite 265
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Head-up Display, shift point
indicator 107
Head-up Display, sport dis‐
plays 107
Head-up Display, standard
view 106
Heavy cargo, stowing
cargo 176
High-beam Assistant 111
High beams 75
High beams/low beams, see
High-beam Assistant 111
Hills 186
Hill start assistant, see Drive-
off assistant 137
Holder for beverages 173
Homepage 6
Hood 223
Horn 16
Hot exhaust gas system 185
Hotline, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
HUD Head-up Display 105
Hydroplaning 185
I
Ice warning, see External tem‐
perature warning 96
Icy roads, see External tem‐
perature warning 96
Identification marks, tires 208
Identification number, see Ve‐
hicle identification num‐
ber 12
Ignition off 69
Ignition on 69
Illuminated ring, central in‐
strument cluster 105
Indication of a flat
tire 120, 124
Indicator light, see Check Con‐
trol 92
Individual air distribu‐
tion 159, 162
Individual settings, see Per‐
sonal Profile 46
Inductive charging, see Wire‐
less charging, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Inflation pressure, tires 202
Inflation pressure warning,
tires 123
Info Display, see Onboard
Computer 100
Information 6
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 119
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 123
Instrument cluster 91
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 92
Instrument lighting 113
Integrated key 42
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle 31
Intelligent Safety 125
Intended use 8
Intensity, AUTO program 161
Interior equipment 165
Interior lights 113
Interior lights during unlock‐
ing 39
Interior lights with the vehicle
locked 39
Interior mirror 61
Interior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 63
Interior mirror, compass 167
Interior mirror, manually dim‐
mable 62
Interior motion sensor 50
Internet site 6
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 97
Interval mode 76, 79
In the vicinity of the center
console 18
In the vicinity of the roof‐
liner 19
In the vicinity of the steering
wheel 16
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 220
Jam protection system, glass
sunroof 54
Jam protection system, win‐
dows 51
Jump-starting 244
K
Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐
cess 43
Key Memory, see Personal
Profile 46
Key, see Integrated key 42
Key, see Remote control 38
Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐
mission 86
Knee airbag 116
L
Label on recommended
tires 212
Label, runflat tires 213
Language on Control Dis‐
play 104
Lashing eyes 176
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 66
Launch Control 89
Leather, care 251
LED ring, central instrument
cluster 105
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 234
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 27
Light 109
Seite 266
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Light-alloy wheels, care 252
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 234
Lighter 169
Lighting 109
Light replacement 234
Light replacement,
front 235, 237
Light replacement, rear 238
Light replacement, side 241
Lights and bulbs 234
Light switch 109
Load 176
Loading 175
Loading position 177
Locking, automatic 48
Locking, from inside 42
Locking, settings 48
Low beams 109
Low beams, automatic, see
High-beam Assistant 111
Lower back support, mechani‐
cal 56
Lug bolt lock 219
Luggage rack, see Roof-
mounted luggage rack 187
Lumbar support, mechani‐
cal 56
M
Maintenance 231
Maintenance require‐
ments 231
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 97
Maintenance system,
MINI 231
Make-up mirror 169
Malfunction displays, see
Check Control 92
Manual air distribu‐
tion 159, 162
Manual air flow 158, 162
Manual mode, transmis‐
sion 87
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 199
Manual operation, PDC Park
Distance Control 148
Manual operation, rearview
camera 150
Manual transmission 82
Manufacturer of the MINI 8
Map update, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Matte finish 251
Maximum cooling 161
Maximum speed, display 98
Maximum speed, winter
tires 212
Measurement, units of 104
Mechanical key 42
Medical kit 244
Menu in instrument clus‐
ter 100
Menus, see Central Informa‐
tion Display (CID) operating
concept 22
Messages, see Check Con‐
trol 92
Microfilter 159, 163
MID - program, driving dy‐
namics 136
MINI Connected, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
MINI driving modes 136
MINI logo projection during
unlocking 39
MINI maintenance sys‐
tem 231
MINIMALISM Analyser 194
MINIMALISM information 192
MINI Motorer’s Guide app 33
Minimum tread, tires 210
Mirrors 61
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 185
Mobility System 213
Modifications, technical, see
For Your Own Safety 8
Moisture in headlight 235
Monitor, see Control Dis‐
play 20
Motorer’s Guide app, see MINI
Motorer’s Guide app 33
Mounting of child restraint
systems 65
MP3 player, see Audio, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 16
Multimedia, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Music hard disk, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
N
Navigation, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Neck restraints, front, see
Head restraints 59
Neck restraints, rear, see
Head restraints 60
Neutral cleaner, see Wheel
cleaner 252
New wheels and tires 211
Notes, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
O
OBD Onboard Diagnos‐
tics 232
Seite 267
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Obstacle marking, rearview
camera 151
Octane rating, see Recom‐
mended fuel grade 201
Odometer 96
Office, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication 6
Oil 225
Oil, adding 226
Oil additives 227
Oil change 228
Oil change interval, service re‐
quirements 97
Oil filler neck 226
Oil types, alternative 227
Oil types, suitable 227
Old batteries, disposal 242
Onboard Computer 100
Onboard Diagnostics
OBD 232
Onboard literature,
printed 31
Onboard vehicle tool kit 233
On-call service, see Roadside
Assistance 244
Online Owner's Manual 33
Opening and closing 38
Opening, from inside 42
Operating menus, Central In‐
formation Display (CID) 20
Optional equipment 7
Owner's Manual media 31
Owner's Manual, printed 31
P
Paint, vehicle 251
Panic alarm, see Panic
mode 49
Panic mode 49
Panoramic glass sunroof 52
Parallel parking assistant 152
Park Distance Control
PDC 146
Parked-car ventilation 163
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 187
Parking aid, see PDC 146
Parking assistant 152
Parking brake 74
Parking lights 109
Parts and accessories 8
Passenger's side mirror, tilt‐
ing 62
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
era 151
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 146
Performance Control 136
Personal Profile 46
Person warning with City light
braking function 129
Plastic, care 252
PostCrash — iBrake 133
Power failure 242
Power windows 50
Prescribed engine oil
types 227
Pressure, tires 202
Pressure warning, tires 123
Printed onboard literature 31
Profile, see Personal Pro‐
file 46
Programmable memory but‐
tons, Central Information
Display (CID) 26
Protective function, glass sun‐
roof 54
Protective function, win‐
dows 51
Push-and-turn reel, see Con‐
troller 21
R
Racetrack operation 188
Radiator fluid 229
Radio-operated remote con‐
trol, opening/closing 38
Radio-ready state 70
Radio, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication 6
Rain sensor 76, 79
Ratchet straps 176
Rear fog light 112
Rear lights 238
Rear luggage rack 187
Rearview camera 149
Rear window de‐
froster 159, 163
Recirculated-air filter 163
Recirculated-air
mode 158, 162
Recommended fuel
grade 201
Recommended tire
brands 212
Refueling 198
Remaining range 97
Remote control, additional 41
Remote control, loss 41
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 41
Remote control, opening/clos‐
ing 38
Remote control, replacing the
battery 40
Remote control, univer‐
sal 165
Replacing parts 233
Replacing the battery, remote
control 40
Replacing wheels/tires 211
Reporting safety malfunc‐
tions 13
RES CNCL button, see Camera-
based cruise control 139
RES CNCL button, see Cruise
control 144
Reserve warning, see
Range 97
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 119
Retreaded tires 212
Roadside Assistance 244
Seite 268
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Roadside parking lights 110
Rolling code hand-held trans‐
mitter 166
RON recommended fuel
grade 201
Roofliner 19
Roof load capacity 257
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 187
Route, navigation, see Own‐
er's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
RSC Runflat System Compo‐
nent, see Runflat tires 213
Rubber components,
care 252
Runflat tires 213
S
Safe braking 186
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passenger
seat 59
Safety belts 57
Safety belts, care 253
Safety locks, doors, and win‐
dows 68
Safety switch, windows 52
Safety systems, airbags 115
Saving fuel 189
Screen, see Control Display 20
Screwdriver 233
Sealant 213
Seat heating, front 57
Seating position for chil‐
dren 64
Seats, front 55
Securing cargo 176
Selection list in instrument
cluster 100
Sensors, care 253
Service and warranty 9
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service CBS 231
Service requirements, dis‐
play 97
Servotronic 138
SET button, see Camera-based
cruise control 139
SET button, see Cruise con‐
trol 144
Settings, locking/unlocking 48
Settings, mirrors 61
Settings on Control Dis‐
play 104
Shift gate rotary switch 136
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 88
Shift point indicator, Head-up
Display 107
Side airbag 115
Signaling, horn 16
Signals when unlocking 49
Sitting safely 55
Size 256
Slide/tilt glass roof 52
SMS, see Short messages, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
SMS text messages, supple‐
mentary 95
Snow chains 217
Socket 169
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 232
Sound output, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Spare tire, see Emergency
wheel 221
Speed, average 101
Speed Limit Info 98
Speed Limit Info, Onboard
Computer 102
Speed limits, display 98
Speed warning 103
Split screen 25
Sport displays 102
Sport displays, Head-up Dis‐
play 107
SPORT program, driving dy‐
namics 137
Sport program, transmis‐
sion 86
Stability control systems 134
Standard equipment 7
Standard view, Head-up Dis‐
play 106
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 71
Start/Stop button 69
Starting the engine 70
Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Status control display,
tires 119
Status information, Central In‐
formation Display (CID) 25
Status of Owner's Manual 7
Steering assistance 138
Steering wheel, adjusting 63
Steptronic Sport transmission,
see Steptronic transmis‐
sion 83
Steptronic Sport transmission
with double clutch, see Step‐
tronic transmission 83
Steptronic transmission 83
Steptronic transmission with
double clutch, see Steptronic
transmission 83
Stopping the engine 71
Storage compartments 172
Storage, tires 212
Storing the vehicle 253
Stowing and securing
cargo 176
Summer tires, tread 210
Sun visor 169
Supplementary Owner's Man‐
uals 31
Seite 269
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
Supplementary SMS text mes‐
sages 95
Switch for driving dynam‐
ics 136
Switch, see Cockpit 16
Symbols 7
Symbols in the status field 25
T
Tachometer 96
Tailgate 45
Tailgate via remote control 40
Tail lights 238
Technical changes, see For
Your Own Safety 8
Technical data 256, 259
Telephone, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Teleservices, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Temperature, air condi‐
tioner 158
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 160
Temperature display for exter‐
nal temperature 96
Temperature, engine 102
Terminal, starting aid 245
Theft alarm system, see Alarm
system 49
Thigh support 56
Tilt alarm sensor 50
Tilting, passenger's side mir‐
ror 62
Time 104
Time of arrival 102
Tire damage 210
Tire identification marks 208
Tire inflation pressure 202
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, see FTM 123
Tire pressure 202
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 118
Tire repair kit, see Mobility
System 213
Tires, changing 211
Tire sealant, see Mobility Sys‐
tem 213
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 202
Tires, runflat 213
Tire tread 210
Tone, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication 6
Tools 233
Total vehicle weight 257
Touchpad 23
Towing 246
Tow-starting 246
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 118
Traction control 135
TRACTION driving mode, driv‐
ing dynamics 135
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Trailer hitch, care 253
Transmission lock, electronic
unlocking 89
Transmission lock, releasing
manually 88
Transmission, manual trans‐
mission 82
Transmission, see Steptronic
transmission 83
Transporting children
safely 64
Tread, tires 210
Trip computer 102
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 74
Trip odometer 96
Trip recorder, see Trip odome‐
ter 96
Turning radius lines, rearview
camera 151
Turn signal, front 235, 237
Turn signal, side 241
Turn signals, operation 74
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐
placement 238
U
Unintentional alarm 50
Units of measurement 104
Universal remote control 165
Unlocking, settings 48
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 7
Upholstery care 252
USB interface, position in vehi‐
cle 170
USB port, see USB inter‐
face 170
Use, intended 8
V
Vanity mirror 169
Vehicle battery 242
Vehicle battery, replacing 242
Vehicle, break-in 184
Vehicle care 251
Vehicle care products 251
Vehicle features and op‐
tions 7
Vehicle identification num‐
ber 12
Vehicle jack 220
Vehicle paint 251
Vehicle storage 253
Vehicle wash 250
Vehicle, washing 250
Ventilation 163
Ventilation, see Parked-car
ventilation 163
Seite 270
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
VIN, see Vehicle identification
number 12
Voice activation system 28
Voice command response, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
W
Warning and indicator lights,
see Check Control 92
Warning displays, see Check
Control 92
Warning messages, see Check
Control 92
Warning triangle 244
Warranty 8
Washer fluid 81
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 77, 80
Washing the vehicle 250
Water on roads 185
Weights 257
Welcome lights 110
Welcome lights during unlock‐
ing 39
Wheel cleaner 252
Wheels, changing 211
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 202
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 123
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 118
Window defroster,
rear 159, 163
Windows, powered 50
Windshield cleaning sys‐
tem 75, 78
Windshield de‐
froster 159, 163
Windshield washer fluid 81
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 77, 80
Windshield wipers, fold-away
position 77, 80
Windshield wipers, see Wiper
system 75, 78
Winter storage, care 253
Winter tires, suitable tires 212
Winter tires, tread 210
Wiper blades, replacing 233
Wiper fluid 81
Wiper system 75, 78
Wireless charging dock, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Wireless charging, see Wire‐
less charging, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Wood, care 252
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 27
Wrench 233
Seite 271
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
01402983336 ue
*BL298333600I*
DRIVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983336 - X/17
